You are on page 1of 173

SUPPORT MATERIAL

FOR
ANNUAL EXAMINATION: 2022-23
CLASS-XII SCIENCE
SUBJECT- PHYSICS

FEATURES

MODEL SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER


MARKING SCHEME
CHAPTER WISE QUESTIONS
SOLUTION TO THE QUESTIONS

REGIONAL TRAINING CENTRE


DAV INSTITUTIONS
ODISHA ZONE
CONTENT
Sl.No. Topic Pages
Sample Paper-1
01 1 - 14
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-2
02 15 - 26
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-3
03 27 - 37
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-4
04 38 - 52
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-5
05 53 - 60
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-6
06 61 - 71
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-7
07 72 - 82
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-8
08 83 - 96
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-9
09 97 - 112
(With Marking Scheme)
Sample Paper-10
10 113 - 122
(With Marking Scheme)
Chapter Wise Questions with Solution
11 Chapter–1: Electric Charges and Fields 123 - 126
12 Chapter–2: Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 126 - 129
13 Chapter–3: Current Electricity 129 - 132
14 Chapter–4: Moving Charges and Magnetism 132 - 134
15 Chapter–5: Magnetism and Matter 134 - 136
16 Chapter–6: Electromagnetic Induction 136 - 139
17 Chapter–7: Alternating Current 139 - 141
18 Chapter–8: Electromagnetic Waves 141 - 144
19 Chapter–9: Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 144 - 147
20 Chapter–10: Wave Optics 147 - 150
21 Chapter–11: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 150 - 152
22 Chapter–12: Atoms 152 - 155
23 Chapter–13: Nuclei 155 - 158
Chapter–14: Semiconductor Electronics: Materials, Devices and
24 158 - 160
Simple Circuits
25 Solution to the questions (Chapter-1 to Chapter-14) 161 - 171
SAMPLE PAPER -1
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. A point charge q is placed at a distance a/2 directly above the centre of a square of side a. The electric
flux through the square is: [1]
(i) q/ԑ0 (ii) q/4ԑ0 (iii) q/6ԑ0 (iv) q/πԑ0
2. An electron enters in an electric field with its velocity in the direction of the electric lines of force.
Then: [1]
(i) the path of the electron will be a circle (ii) the path of the electron will be a parabola
(iii) the velocity of the electron will decrease (iv) the velocity of the electron will increase
3. A coil develops heat of 800 calories when a potential difference of 20 V is applied across its ends.
The resistance of coil is : [1]
(i)1.2 Ω (ii)0.12 Ω (ii)1.4 Ω (iv) 0.14 Ω
4. The distance at which the magnetic field on axis as compared to the magnetic field at the centre of the coil
carrying current I and radius R is 1/8, would be [1]
(i) R (ii) √2R (iii) 2 R (iv)√3 R
5. A bar magnet when placed at an angle of 300 to the direction of magnetic field induction of 5x10-2 T,
experiences a moment of couple 25x10-6 Nm. If the length of the magnet is 5 cm, its pole strength is [1]
(i) 2 x 10-2 Am (ii) 5 x 10 -2Am (iii) 2 Am (iv) 5 Am
6. A wheel with ten metallic spokes each 0.50 m long is rotated with a speed of 120 rev/min in a plane
normal to the earth’s magnetic field at the plane. If the magnitude of the field is 0.4 G, the induced emf
between the axle and the rim of the wheel is equal to: [1]
(i) 1.256 x 10 V-3 (ii) 6.28 x 10 V-4 -4
(iii) 1.256 x 10 V -5
(iv) 6.28 x 10 V
7. An AC source is 120 V -60 Hz. The value of voltage after 1/720 seconds from start will be [1]
(i) 20.2 C (ii) 42.4 V (iii) 84.8 V (iv)106.8 V
8. Which of the following electromagnetic waves is used for LASIK eye surgery? [1]
(i) Radio waves (ii)Micro waves (iii)UV- rays (iv)Infrared waves
9. A piece of plane glass is placed on a word with letters of different colours. The letters which appear
minimum raised are: [1]
(i) red (ii) green (iii) yellow (iv) violet
Page-1
10. In a Young’s double slit experiment the source is a white light. One of the holes is covered by red filter
and another by a blue filter. In this case [1]
(i) there will be alternate interference patterns of red and blue
(ii) there will be an interference pattern for red distinct from that for blue
(iii) there will be no interference fringes
(iv) there will be an interference pattern for red mixing with one for blue
11. For a uniform electric field E along the x- axis, the equipotential surfaces are planes [1]
(i) normal to the y-axis (ii) normal to the z-axis (iii) normal to the x-axis (iv) parallel to the xz-plane
12. Two positive point charges are 3 m apart and their combined charge is 20𝜇𝐶.If the force between them
is 0.075 N, then the charges are: [1]
(i) 10 𝜇𝐶, 10 𝜇𝐶 (ii)15 𝜇𝐶, 5 𝜇𝐶 (iii)12 𝜇𝐶, 8 𝜇𝐶 (iv)14 𝜇𝐶, 6 𝜇𝐶
13. Two batteries of emf 4 V and 8 V with internal resistance1 ohm and 2 ohms are connected in a circuit
with a resistance of 9 ohm as shown in figure. The current and potential difference between the points P
and Q are: [1]
(i) 1/3A and 3 V
(ii) 1/6 A and 4 V
(iii) 1/9 A and 9 V
(iv) 1/12A and 12 V

14. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source fall on a single slit 1.00 mm wide and
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. The distance between the first dark
fringes on either side of the central bright fringe is [1]
(i) 1.2 cm (ii) 1.2 mm (iii)2.4 cm (iv)2.4 mm
15. In a plano-convex lens the radius of curvature of convex surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens
is 30 cm. The refractive index of the material of the lens will be [1]
(i)1.5 (ii)1.66 (iii)1.33 (iv) 3
16. Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
ASSERTION (A): A charge moving in a circular orbit can produce electromagnetic wave.
REASON (R): The source of electromagnetic wave should be a charge in accelerated motion.
17. Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b)Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d)A is false and R is also false.
ASSERTION (A): A wire carrying an electric current has no electric field around it.
REASON (R): Rate of flow of electrons in one direction is equal to the rate of flow of protons in
opposite direction.

Page-2
18. Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b)Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d)A is false and R is also false.
ASSERTION (A): If the objective and eyepiece of a microscope are interchanged, then it can work
as telescope.
REASON (R): The objective lens of a telescope has short focal length and large aperture.
SECTION B

19. Calculate the work done to dissociate the system of three charges [2]
placed on the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 10 cm as
shown in figure, where q = 1.6 x 10-10 C

OR

A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and separation d is filled [2]


with dielectrics of dielectric constants k1 and k2 as shown in the
figure. Find the net capacitance of the capacitor.
20. Two wires X and Y have the same resistivity but their cross-sectional areas are in the ratio 2:3 and
lengths in the ratio 1:2. They are connected in parallel to a d.c. source. Find out the ratio of the drift
speeds of the electrons in the two wires for this case. [2]
21. In a plane electromagnetic wave, the electric field oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of 2.0 x 10 HZ10

and amplitude 48 V/m. [2]


(i) Calculate is the wavelength of the wave? (ii)Find the amplitude of oscillating magnetic field?
22. Figure shows two identical rectangular loops (1) and (2), placed on a table along with a straight long
current carrying conductor between them [2]
i) Mention the direction of induced currents in the loops when they
are pulled away from the conductor with the same velocity?
ii) Will the emf induced in the two loops be equal? Justify your
answer.

23. A lamp is connected in series with an inductor and an a.c. source. [2]
What happens to the brightness of the lamp when the key is plugged in
and an iron rod is inserted inside the inductor? Explain.

24. Show that in the process of charging a capacitor, the current produced within the plates of the capacitor

is

Where ΦE is the electric flux produced during charging of the capacitor plates. [2]
25. Draw the magnetic field lines distinguishing between diamagnetic and paramagnetic materials. Give a
simple explanation to account for the difference in the magnetic behavior of these materials. [2]
OR
An electron moving horizontally with a velocity of 4x104 m/s enters a
region of uniform magnetic field of 10-5 T acting vertically downward as
shown. Draw its trajectory and find time it takes to come out of the region of
magnetic field. [2]
Page-3
SECTION - C

26. Show that if we connect the inner sphere and the outer shell by a wire,
the charge q on the former will always flow to the latter, independent of how
large Q is. [3]

27. Two cells of emf E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1 and r2


are connected in parallel as shown in the figure.

Deduce an expression for the

i) equivalent emf of the combination


ii) equivalent internal resistance of the combination
iii) potential difference between the points [3]
28. The figure shows three infinitely long straight parallel current
carrying conductors. Find the
(i) Magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field at point A
lying on conductor 1
(ii) Magnetic force on conductor 2. [3]
OR

A square loop of side 20 cm carrying current of 1A is kept near an infinite long straight wire carrying a
current of 2A in the same plane as shown in the figure. Calculate the magnitude and direction of the net
force exerted on the loop due to the current carrying conductor. [3]

29. A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c. source having voltage V = V0sinωt. Using phasor diagram,
derive expressions for impedance, instantaneous current and its phase relationship to the applied voltage.
Also draw graphs of V and I versus ωt for the circuit. [3]
OR
In a series LCR circuit connected to an a.c. source of variable frequency and voltage.
Draw a plot showing the variation of amplitude of circuit current with angular frequency of applied
voltage for two different values of resistance R1 and R2, R1>R2.
Answer the following using this graph:
i) In which case the resonance is sharper and why?
ii) In which case the power dissipation is more and why? [3]
30. A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 800 nm and 600 nm, is used to obtain the interference
fringes in a Young’s double slit experiment on a screen is placed 1.4 m away. If two slits are separated by
0.28 mm. Calculate the least distance from the central bright maximum where the bright fringes of the two
wavelengths coincide [3]

Page-4
SECTION - D

31. i) Using Gauss’s law, obtain the expression for electric field intensity at
a point due to an infinitely large, plane sheet of charge density σ C/m2.

ii) Given the components of an electric field as EX=xi, EY= 0 and EZ= 0,
where C is dimensional constant. Calculate the flux through the cube of side
‘a’ as shown in the figure and the effective charge inside the cube. [5]

OR

i) A charge is distributed uniformly over a ring of radius ‘a’. Obtain an expression for the electric field
intensity E at a point on the axis of the ring. Hence show that for point at large distances from the ring, it
behaves like a point charge.

ii) A point charge is placed in the vicinity of a conducting surface. Trace the field lines between the charge
and the conducting surface. [5]

32. Consider a long straight cylindrical wire of circular cross section of


radius ‘a’ as shown in the figure. The current I is uniformly distributed
across this cross section. Using Ampere’s circuital law calculate the
magnetic field B in the region r< a and r >a.

Plot a graph of B versus r from the centre of the wire. [5]

OR

Derive an expression for the torque acting on a rectangular current carrying loop kept in a uniform magnetic
field B.

(i) Indicate the direction of torque acting on the loop.


(ii) If the loop is free to rotate, what would be its orientation in stable equilibrium? [5]
33. Draw a labelled ray diagram to show the image formation by a compound microscope when image is
formed at the least distance of distinct vision.
i) Define its magnifying power in this adjustment and derive the expression for its magnifying power in
this adjustment.
ii) You are given two converging lenses of focal lengths 1.25 cm and 5 cm to design a compound
microscope. If it is desired to have a magnification of 30, find out the separation between the
objective and the eyepiece. [5]

OR

i) Draw a labelled ray diagram to show the image formation by an astronomical telescope in normal
adjustment.
ii) Define magnifying power of an astronomical telescope in normal adjustment (i.e., when the final
image is formed at infinity) and derive the expression for its magnifying power.
iii) You are given three lenses of power 0.5 D, 4 D and 10 D to design a telescope. Which lenses should
you use as an objective and eyepiece of an astronomical telescope? Justify your answer. [5]

Page-5
SECTION - E

34. CASE STUDY:

Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.

An inductor is simply a coil or a solenoid that has a fixed


inductance. It is referred to as choke. The circuit symbol for an
inductor is shown in the figure.

Let the current I flows through the inductor from A to B. Whenever electric current changes through it, a
back emf is generated. If the resistance of the inductor is assumed to be zero, then induced emf is given by

E = VB – VA = L(dI/dt)

Thus, as we move in the direction of current, the potential drops across an inductor. Potential also drops
across a pure resistor if we move in the direction of current.

The main difference between a resistor and an inductor is that while resistor opposes the current through it
an inductor opposes the change in current through it.

Answer the following questions.

i) If current through the solenoid decreases, what will be the direction of induced current? [1]
ii) If the length of a solenoid is increased then how does its self-inductance change? [1]
iii) How does an inductor behave when a steady current flows through it? Explain. [2]
OR

If a soft iron core is inserted in the solenoid which is connected to an ac source, then what will
happen to the magnetic energy stored in it? Explain. [2]

35.CASE STUDY:
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
The total internal reflection of the light is used in polishing diamonds
to create a sparking brilliance. Value of critical angle of diamond is
very small (24.40) due to its high refractive index (2.42). By
polishing the diamond with specific cuts, it is adjusted in such a
manner that most of the light rays approaching the surface are
incident with an angle of incidence more than critical angle. Hence,
they suffer multiple reflections and ultimately come out of diamond
from the top. This gives the diamond a sparking brilliance.
i) How is the critical angle of a medium related to its refractive
index? [1]
ii) What is the basic reason for the extraordinary sparkle of suitably cut diamond? [1]
iii) The following diagram shows same diamond cut in two different shapes [2]
In which of the two cases (first or second one) the sparkling
of diamond will be more and why?

OR

A diamond is immersed in a liquid with a refractive index greater than water. Then how does the value of
the critical angle change? [2]

Page-6
MARKING SCHEME(SAMPLE PAPER-1)
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 iii 1
2 iii 1
3 ii 1
4 iv 1
5 i 1
6 iv 1
7 iii 1
8 iii 1
9 i 1
10 iii 1
11 iii 1
12 ii 1
13 i 1
14 iv 1
15 iii 1
16 a 1
17 c 1
18 d 1
1

OR
19

OR
1

1/2
1/2
20
½
1/2

21 1+1

22 1+1

Page-7
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS
Brightness decreases
1
Reason: When iron rod is inserted, inductance increases
23
also increases, so current decreases and bright 1
decreases.
½

½
24

½+½

OR OR
25
1

26 1

Page-8
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS

1
27
1

½
28 OR
OR
1

29

Page-9
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS

OR OR

30 1

Page-10
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS
i)

ii)
1

31 OR OR

Page-11
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS

32
OR
OR

Page-12
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS
1

III)
33

OR
OR

1
1

Page-13
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO POINTS
i) From A to B 1
ii) Increases 1
iii) It behaves like a perfect conductor 2
34 Reason: I = constant, e = L(dI/dt) = 0
IR = 0. R = 0 OR
OR
(iii)Energy stored in the inductor increases 2
Reason: On inserting the soft iron core, L increases. So, PE = ½ LI2increases
i) μ = 1/sin C 1
ii) Very small value of its critical angle w.r.t. air 1
iii) In case of first one. Reason: Multiple TIR occurs 2
35 OR
OR
2
(iii)Increases, Reason: The Liquid is optically denser than air so RI of diamond w.r.t. the liquid
is less. Hence critical angle is more.
Page-14
SAMPLE PAPER -2
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A

1. Three equal charges q are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side a. A charge Q is
placed such that its distance from each charge is r. The force experienced by Q will be [1]
qQ qQ qQ
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) zero
4 o r 4 o r  a  4 o r  a 
2 2 2

2. The expression for the capacity of the capacitor formed by compound dielectric placed between the
plates of a parallel plate capacitor as shown in figure, will be (area of plate = A) : [1]
o A o A
(i) (ii)
 d1 d d   d1  d 2  d 3 
  2  3   
 K1 K 2 K 3   K1  K 2  K 3 
 AK 1 K 2 K 3  AK 1 AK 2 AK 3
(iii) o (iv)  
d1 d 2 d 3 d1 d2 d3

3. The current in 8 resistance in this figure is : [1]

(i) 0.92 A (ii) 1.3 A

9
(iii) A (iv) 1.6 A
13

4. A wire PQRS formed by joining two semicircular wires of radii R1 and R2 carries a current I as
shown in figure. The magnitude of magnetic field at the centre O is : [1]
o I  11  o I  1 1 
(i)    (ii)   
4  R1 R2  4  R1 R2 

o I  1 1  o I  11 
(iii)    (iv)   
2  R1 R2  4  R1 R2 

Page-15
5. If the back emf induced in a coil, when current changes from 1 A to zero in one millisecond is 5
volts, the self-inductance of the coil of the coil is: [1]
(i) 5 H (ii) 1 H -3
(iii) 5×10 H 3
(iv) 5×10 H
6. When frequency of applied alternating voltage is very high then: [1]
(i) A capacitor will tend to become short (ii)An inductor will tend to become short
(iii) Both (a) and (b) (iv)No one will become short
7. The refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass is 5/3. What will be the critical angle of ray of
light entering water from glass?` [1]

4 5 1 2
sin 1 sin 1 sin 1 sin 1
(i) 5 (ii) 4 (iii) 2 (iv) 1

8. A double-slit interference experiment is carried out in air and the entire apparatus is kept inside
water, the fringe width: [1]
(i) increases (ii) decreases
(iii) remains unchanged (iv) fringe pattern disappears.
9. For a plano-convex lens for which µ = 1.5 has radius of curvature of 10cm. It is silvered on its plane
surface. Find the focal length after silvering. [1]
(i)10cm (ii) 20cm (iii) 30cm (iv) 25cm
0
10. An α- particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through 180 by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance
of closest approach is of the order of : [1]
0
(i) 1 A (ii) 10-10 cm (iii) 10-12 cm (iv) 10-15 cm
11. The radius of Ge nuclide is measured to be twice the radius of 𝐵𝑒 . The number of nucleons in Ge
are: [1]
(i)72 (ii) 73 (iii) 74 (iv) 75
12. Which of the following is reverse biased? [1]
(i) (ii)

(iii) (iv)

13. Find the position of point from wire 'B' where net magnetic
field is zero due to following current distribution: [1]
(i) 4 cm
(ii) (ii) 30/7 cm
(iii) 12/7 cm
(iv) (iv) 2 cm
14. A magnetic needle suspended parallel to a magnetic field requires √3 J of work to turn it through
600. The torque required to maintain the needle in this position will be: [1]

(i) 2√3 Nm (ii) √3 Nm (iii) 3 Nm (iv) 1.5 Nm

Page-16
15. The current in the circuit will be [1]

(i)1/8 A
(ii) 1/10 A
(iii) ½ A
(iv) ¼ A

16. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion(A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false

Assertion (A): The ozone layer present at the top of stratosphere is very crucial for human survival
Reason (R): Ozone layer prevents IR radiation.

17. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion(A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b)Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c)A is true but R is false
(d)A is false and R is also false

Assertion (A): Fuse wire has high resistance and low melting point.
Reason (R): Fuse wire is for small current flow only.

18. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion(A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b)Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c)A is true but R is false
(d)A is false and R is also false

Assertion (A): A step up transformer converts input low AC voltage to output AC high voltage
Reason (R): It violates the law of conservation of energy.

SECTION - B
19. Two electric bulbs have the following specifications [2]
(i) 100 W at 220 V (ii) 1000 W at 220 V.
Which bulb has higher resistance? What is the ratio of their resistance?
OR
A conductor of length ‘l’ is connected to a dc source of potential ‘V’. If the length of the conductor is
tripled by gradually stretching it, keeping ‘V’ constant, how will [2]
(i) drift speed of electrons and
(ii) resistance of the conductor be affected? Justify your answer.

Page-17
20. A 600pF capacitor is charged by a 200 V supply. It is then disconnected from the supply and is
connected to another uncharged 600 pF capacitor. How much electrostatic energy is lost in the
process? [2]
21.Answer the following questions: [2]
(a) Name the em-waves which are produced during radioactive decay of a nucleus. Write their
frequency range.
(b)Welder wear special glass goggles while working. Why? Explain.
OR
Answer the followings: [2]
(a)Name the em waves which are suitable for radar systems and in aircraft navigation? Write the
range of frequency of these waves.
(b) If the earth did not have atmosphere, would its average surface temperature be higher or lower
than what it is now? Explain
22. (a) The susceptibility of a magnetic materials is – 4.2 × 10-6. Name the type of magnetic materials it
represents.
(b)Write Curie’s law for paramagnetic substances [2]
23. Explain how Einstein’s photoelectric equation enables us to understand: [2]

(i) existence of a threshold frequency for a given photo emitter, and


(ii) the linear dependence of the maximum energy of the emitted electrons on the frequency of incident
radiation
24. The energy levels of a hypothetical atom are shown below. Which of these transitions correspond to
emission of radiation of
(i) maximum and
(ii) minimum wavelength? [2]

25. Name the important process that occurs during the formation of a p-n junction. Explain briefly, with
the help of a suitable diagram, how a p-n junction is formed. [2]
SECTION - C
26. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons gets doubled when the wavelength of the light
incident on the surface changes from λ1 to λ2. Derive the expressions for
(a) work function for the metal surface
(b) the threshold wavelength λ0 [3]
27. Derive an expression for drift velocity of free electrons in a conductor in terms of relaxation time of
electrons. [3]
28. You are given three lenses, L1, L2 and L3 each of focal length 20cm. An object is kept at 40 cm in
front of L1 as shown. The final real image is formed at the focus ‘I’ of L3. Find the separations
between L1, L2 and L3. [3]

Page-18
OR
(a) The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the speed of light in glass? (speed of light in
vacuum is 3.0 × 108 ms-1).
(b) Is the speed of light in glass independent of the colour of light? If not, which of the two
colours red and violet, travels slower in the glass prism? [3]
29. Explain with the help of a circuit diagram, the working of p-n diode as a full wave rectifier. Draw a
sketch of the input and output waveforms. [3]
OR
Draw the circuit arrangement for studying the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode (i) in
forward bias and (ii) in reverse bias. Draw the typical V-I characteristics of a silicon diode.
Describe briefly the following terms:
(i) “minority carrier injection” in forward bias
(ii)“breakdown voltage” in reverse bias. [3]
30 (a) 𝐻𝑒 + 𝐻𝑒  𝐻𝑒 + 𝐻 + 𝐻 + 12.86 MeV
In the above nuclear reaction though the number of nucleons is conserved on both sides of the
reaction, yet the energy is released. How? Explain.
(b) Draw a plot of potential energy between a pair of nucleons as a function of their separation.
Mark the regions where nuclear force is (i) attractive and (ii) repulsive [3]
SECTION - D
31. Find an expression for the electric field strength at a distant point situated (i) on the axis and (ii)
along the equatorial line of an electric dipole. [5]
OR
(i) Use Gauss’s theorem to find the electric field due to a uniformly charged infinitely large plane
thin sheet with surface charge density .
(ii) An infinitely large thin plane sheet has a uniform surface charge density +.Obtain the
expression for the amount of work done in bringing a point charge q from infinity to a point,
distance r in front of the charged plane sheet. [5]
32.Explain the term inductive reactance. Show graphically the variation of inductive reactive with
frequency of the applied alternating voltage.
An ac voltage V = Vo sin ωt is applied across a pure inductor of inductance L. Find an expression
for the current i, flowing in the circuit and show mathematically that the current flowing through its

lags being the applied voltage by a phase angle of . And draw (i) phasor diagram (ii) graphs of V
2
and i versus ωt for the circuit. [5]
OR
Define the term capacitive reactance. Show graphically the variation of capacitive reactance with
frequency of applied alternating voltage.
An ac voltage V = V0 sin ωt is applied across a pure capacitor of capacitance C. Find an
expression for current flowing through it. Show mathematically the current flowing through it leads

the applied voltage by angle . And draw (i) phasor diagram (ii) graphs of V and i versus ωt for the
2
circuit. [5]
33.(a) Draw a labelled ray diagram to obtain the real image formed by an astronomical telescope in
normal adjustment position. Define its magnifying power. Derive an expression for it.
(b) You are given three lenses of power 0.5 D, 4 D and 10 D to design a telescope.
(i) Which lenses should be used as objective and eyepiece? Justify your answer.
(ii)Why is the aperture of the objective preferred to be large? [5]
Page-19
OR
(a) Define power of lens. Write its units.
(b) Deduce the relation
1 1 1
= +
𝑓 𝑓 𝑓
(c) A converging and a diverging lens of equal focal lengths are placed co-axially in contact. Find
the power and the focal length of the combination.
(d) State the conditions for total internal reflection to occur. [5]
SECTION - E
34. FORCE ON A MOVING CHARGE IN A MAGNETIC FIELD:
Static charges do not experience any force in magnetic field. The
charges when moving in a magnetic field experience a force. This force
depends upon the magnetic field, charge and the velocity component
perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field. Fleming’s left-hand
rule can be used to determine the direction of force on a charged
particle.
(i) What is the work done by a magnetic field on a chargedparticle? [1]
(ii) An electron is moving along +ve x-axis in the presence
of uniform magnetic field along +ve y-axis. What is the direction of the force acting on it? [1]
(iii) A proton and a deuteron having equal momenta enter in a region of a uniform magnetic field at
right angle to the direction of the field. Find the ratio of their radii? [2]
OR
A proton and an 𝛼 particle having equal kinetic energy enter in a region of a uniform magnetic field
at right angle to the direction of the field. Find the ratio of their radii. [2]

35.When light from a monochromatic source is incident on a single narrow slit, it gets diffracted and a
pattern of alternate bright and dark fringes is obtained on
screen, called "Diffraction Pattern" of single slit. In diffraction
pattern of single slit, it is found that (a) Central bright fringe is
of maximum intensity and the intensity of any secondary bright
fringe decreases with increase in its order.(b) Central bright
fringe is twice as wide as any other secondary bright or dark
fringe
(i)A diffraction pattern is obtained by using a beam of red
light. What will happen, if the red light is replaced by the
blue light? [1]
(ii) How does the angular separation between fringes in single slit diffraction experiment change when
the separation between the slit and screen will be doubled? [1]
(iii)Determine the angular separation between central maximum and first order maximum of the
diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width 0.25 mm when light of wavelength 5890 A0 is incident
on it normally. [2]
OR
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 600 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern
is observed on a screen 1.2 m away. It is observed that the first minimum is at a distance of 3 mm from
the centre of the screen. Calculate the width of the slit. [2]
Page-20
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-2)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 iv 1
2 i 1
3 iii 1
4 i 1
5 iii 1
6 i 1
7 i 1
8 ii 1
9 i 1
10 iii 1
11 i 1
12 ii 1
13 iii 1
14 iii 1
15 ii 1
16 c 1
17 c 1
18 c 1
2
As R = V /P, the bulb 100W has higher resistance.
= = = 10:1 1
1
OR
(i) Vd = 𝜏= 𝜏 OR
1
Here, vd α 1/l , when the wire length is tripled, drift velocity becomes one third.
19 (ii) Resistance, R = ρl/a
As the volume remains unchanged before after stretching, 1
a1 l1 = a2 l2,
l2 = 3 l1 ⇒ a2 = a1 /3
New resistance, R’ = ρl2 /a2
Substituting the values,
R’= 9 R
Common potential , 𝑉 =
1
Substituting the values, V = 100 V
Initial energy stored , U1= ½ 𝐶 𝑉 ½
20 Putting the values, U1= 12 × 10 -6 J ½
final energy stored , U2 = ½ (𝐶 + 𝐶 ) V2
Putting the values, U2 = 6 × 10 -6 J
energy lost = 6 × 10 -6 J
(a)Gamma rays, 3 × 10 19 Hz to 5 × 1024 Hz ½+½
(b)To protect their eyes from harmful UV radiations 1
OR OR
21 (a)Microwaves, 109 to 1012 Hz ½+½
(b)In the absence of atmosphere, there would be no greenhouse effect on the surface
of the Earth. As a result, the temperature of the Earth would decrease rapidly, making 1
it difficult for human survival.
Page-21
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i) Diamagnetic 1
(ii)According to Curie's Law, in a paramagnetic substance magnetic susceptibility is
22 inversely proportional to its absolute temperature. 1

𝜒 α ⇒ 𝜒 = , where C is Curie constant.
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is,
K max = h (𝜐 − 𝜐 )
(i)If 𝜐 < 𝜐 ,
i.e. the frequency of incident radiation is less than the threshold frequency, the kinetic 1
energy of photo electrons becomes negative. This has no physical meaning. So
photoelectric emission does not occur below the threshold frequency.
23
(ii)If 𝜐 > 𝜐 , then K max α 𝜐
i.e., above the threshold frequency, the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons
increases linearly with the frequency 𝜐 of the incident radiation. Moreover, the increase
in intensity increases only the number of incident photons and not their energy. Hence
the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is independent of the intensity of 1
incident radiation.
Energy of emitted photon, E = ⇒ Eα ½
½
Therefore, 𝜆 α ½
24. (i) Transition A, for which the energy emission is minimum, corresponds to the emission
of radiation of maximum wavelength. ½
(ii) Transition D, for which the energy emission is maximum, corresponds to the
emission of radiation of minimum wavelength.
Two important processes occurring during the formation of a p-n junction are (i)
diffusion and (ii) drift.
(i)Diffusion: In n-type semiconductor, the concentration of electrons is much greater as
compared to concentration of holes; while in p-type semiconductor, the concentration of
1
holes is much greater than the concentration of electrons. When a p-n junction is formed,
then due to concentration gradient, the holes diffuse from p-side to n-side (p → n) and
electrons diffuse from n-side to p-side (n → p). This motion of charge carriers gives rise
to diffusion current across the junction.
ii) Drift: The drift of charge carriers occurs due to electric field. Due to built in potential 1
barrier, an electric field directed from n-region to p-region is developed across the
25 junction. This field causes motion of electrons on p-side of the junction to n-side and
motion of holes on n-side of junction to p-side. Thus a drift current starts. This current is
opposite to direction of diffusion current

Page-22
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Given that
Initial kinetic energy of photoelectrons =K1
final kinetic energy of photoelectrons =2K1
wavelength of light changes from λ1 to λ2
Let the threshold wavelength is 𝜆 and work function is W0
Now, we know
ℎ𝑐
= 𝑊 + KE
𝜆
= 𝑊 + 𝐾 ----------------------------(i) ½

26 = 𝑊 + 𝐾 -----------------------------(ii)
½
𝐾 = 2𝐾
= 𝑊 + 2𝐾 -----------------------(iii)

Multiplying eq(i) with 2, we get,


= 2𝑊 + 2𝐾 -------------------------(iv)

Subtracting eq (iii) from eq (iv), we get


2𝜆 − 𝜆
𝑊 = ℎ𝑐 1
𝜆 𝜆
We know that,
ℎ𝑐 2𝜆 − 𝜆 𝜆 𝜆
𝑊 = = ℎ𝑐  𝜆 = 1
𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 2𝜆 − 𝜆
When a conductor is subjected to electric field each electron will experiences a force,
F= −eE and acquires an acceleration of ½
𝒆𝑬
a=F/m = ----------------------(1)
𝒎
Here m= mass of electron, e= charge, E= Electric Field.
The average time difference between two consecutive collisions is known as relaxation
time of electron.
𝝉𝟏 + 𝝉𝟐 + 𝝉𝟑 + 𝝉𝟒 + ⋯ ½
(𝝉)𝒂𝒗 =
𝒏
As v = u+ at then drift velocity will be,
𝒗 𝒗 𝒗 ⋯ 𝒗𝒏
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟏 𝟐 𝟑
𝒏
27 (𝒖𝟏 + 𝒖𝟐 + 𝒖𝟑 + ⋯ ) + 𝒂(𝝉𝟏 + 𝝉𝟐 + 𝝉𝟑 + ⋯ ) ½
𝒗𝒅 =
𝒏
Since initially velocity is zero, so ½
𝒂(𝝉𝟏 + 𝝉𝟐 + 𝝉𝟑 + ⋯ )
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟎 +
𝒏
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟎 + 𝒂𝝉 ½
−𝒆𝑬
𝒗𝒅 = 𝝉
𝒎
According to drift velocity expression, the relaxation time is the time interval between
successive collisions of an electron. on increasing temperature, the electrons move
faster and collisions occur quickly. Hence, relaxation time decreases with increase in
temperature which implies that drift velocity also decreases with temperature. ½
Page-23
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Using lens formula for first lens,
= −
= − 1
v= 40 cm right to the first lens
For third lens image will be at focus, so its object will be at infinity, means rays are parallel
between second and third lens.So any finite distance between second and third lens. 1
For second lens, image is at infinity so its object will be at its focus .So Separation between first
and second kens is 40cm +20 cm =60cm. 1
28 OR
OR ½
(a) Given,
𝑐
𝜇= ½
𝑣
𝑐 = 3 × 10 𝑚𝑠
3 × 10 ½
1.5 = ½
𝑣
𝑣 = 2 × 10 m/sec
½
(b) No. the speed of light in glass depends on the colour of light.
½
Violet colour travels slower in glass prism because it has shortest wavelength
circuit diagram
1

1
1

Input and output wave forms


Working OR
OR
Circuit diagram 1
29

V – I characteristics curve
(i) Minority Carrier Injection: Due to the applied voltage, electrons from n-side cross the ½
depletion region and reach p-side (where they are minority carriers). Similarly, holes
from p-side cross this junction and reach the n-side (where they are minority carriers).
This process under forward bias is known as minority carrier injection.
(ii)The current under reverse bias is essentially voltage independent upto a critical
reverse bias voltage, known as breakdown voltage (Vbr ).

Page-24
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a)As the number of nucleons is conserved, the total
rest mass of protons and neutrons on either side of 1
the reaction remains same. But the binding energies
of nuclei on the two sides of the reaction are
different. It is this difference in the biding energies
30 that appears as the energy released in the nuclear
reaction.
(b)graph 1
(i)For a separation greater than r0 , the force is ½
attractive ½
(ii) For separations less than r0 , the force is strongly
repulsive.
(i)At axial or end-on position:
Diagram 1
Proof of equation

If the dipole is infinitely small and point P is far away from the dipole, then r >> a,
therefore equation (i) may be expressed as 1

1/2
(ii)At a point of equatorial line:
Diagram 1
,Proff of equation

1
31

If dipole is infinitesimal and point P is far away, we have a << r, so a2 may be neglected
as compared to r 2 and so the above equation gives
½

in the direction parallel to BA⃗ OR


OR
(i) Derivation of the formula E =
(ii) Work done in bringing a charge q from infinity to a point, distance r, in front 3
of the positively charged plane sheet is,
W = 𝑞 ∫ 𝐸.⃗ 𝑑𝑟⃗ = 𝑞 ∫ 𝐸𝑑𝑟 cos 180
2
= -𝑞∫ 𝑑𝑟 = ∞

Inductive Reactance: The opposition offered by an inductor to the flow of alternating ½


current through it is called the inductive reactance
Graph ½
32 3
Expression for current derivation
Phasor diagram
½
graphs of V and i versus ωt for the circuit.
½
Page-25
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR
Capacitive Reactance: The opposition offered by a capacitor to the flow of alternating
current through it is called the capacitive reactance ½
Graph
½
derivation expression for current
3
Phasor diagram
½
graphs of V and i versus ωt for the circuit.
½
(a)Diagram

Definition of magnifying power and its derivation ½


Derivation of magnifying power 1.5
(b) Objective = 0.5 D , Eye lens = 10 D 1
(i)This choice would give higher magnification as m = =
(ii)The aperture of the objective lens is preferred to be large that it may collect sufficient 1
33 light to form a brighter image of a distant object.
OR OR
(a)Power of lens: It is the reciprocal of focal length of a lens. P = (f is in metre)
Unit of power of a lens is Dioptre. ½
(b)Derivation of the formula, ½
1 1 1
= +
𝑓 𝑓 𝑓 2
(c)Let focal length of the combination be f. ½+1/2
= + ⇒𝑃′ = = + = 0 ⇒ f’ = ∞ ½
(d)Conditions for total internal reflection: ½
(i) Light must travel from denser medium to rarer medium.
(ii) Angle of incidence in denser medium must be greater than critical angle.
(i)Zero 1
(ii)Along - z axis. 1
(iii) r = mv/qB , as momentum and B are constants, r α 1/q As both have the same 2
34 charge, their radii are in the ratio 1:1
OR OR
√ √
r= as as kinetic energy and B are constants, r α
Substituting the required values, their radii are in the ratio 1:1 2
(i)Diffraction pattern becomes narrower and crowded together. 1
(ii)No change. It is independent of the distance between slit and screen. 1
(iii)The angular separation between central maximum and first order maximum of the
35
diffraction pattern is, 𝜃 = 3λ/2d – 0 = 3λ/ 2d Substituting the values, 𝜃 = 3.534 × 10-3 rad 2
𝐎𝐑 OR
Position of first minimum, x1 = λD/d Substituting the values, d = 0.24 mm 2
Page-26
SAMPLE PAPER -3
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1 . The instantaneous values of emf and the current in a series ac circuit are
E = Eo Sin ωt and I= Io sin (ωt+π/3) respectively, then it is : [1]
(i) Necessarily a RL circuit (ii) Necessarily a RC circuit
(iii)Necessarily a LCR circuit (iv) Can be RC or LCR circuit
2. The temperature coefficient of resistance for a wire is .0 00125 / C. At 27°K its resistance is 1 ohm.
The temperature at which the resistance becomes 2 ohm is : [1]
(i) 1154 K (ii) 1100 K (iii) 1400 K (iv) 1127 K
3. Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor when there is no medium between the plates
is C0. If capacitor is now completely filled with dielectric matter of dielectric constant K then
capacitance: [1]
(i) C0/K (ii) KC0 (iii) K2C0 (iv) 2KC0.
4. Charge Q is kept in a sphere of radius 5 cm first than it is kept in a cube of side 5 cm. the outgoing
flux will be: [1]
(i) More in case of sphere (ii) More in case of cube
(iii) Same in both case (iv) Information Incomplete
5. S.I. unit of magnetic pole strength is : [1]
(i) Ampere/meter (ii) Ampere-meter
(iii) volt/meter (iv) Ampere/m2
6. If the no. of turns per unit length of the coil of a solenoid is doubled keeping other dimensions same,
then its self-inductance will be : [1]
(i) Halved (ii) doubled (iii) four times (iv) eight times
7. The magnetic flux linked with the coil (in Weber) is given by the equation –
Փ = 5t2 + 3t + 16 The induced EMF in the coil at time, t=4 will be: [1]
(i) -27 V (ii) -43 V
(iii) -108 V (iv) 210 V
8. The figure shows variation of R, XL and XC with
Frequency f in a series LCR circuit.
Then for what frequency point, the circuit is inductive. [1]
(i)A
(ii) B
(iii) C
(iv) A and B
Page-27
9. The deflecting torque acting on the coil of a galvanometer is : [1]
(i) Inversely proportional to number of turns (ii) Inversely proportional to current flowing
(iii) Inversely proportional to area of the coil (iv) Directly proportional to magnetic field strength
10. What is the ratio of nuclear radii if the mass numbers of two nuclei are 4 and 32? [1]
(i) 1 : 2 (ii) 1 : 3 (iii) 1; 4 (iv) 1 : 5
11. Which spectral series of hydrogen lie in UV region? [1]
(i) Paschen (ii) Lyman (iii) Brackett (iv) Balmer
12. EM waves can be produced by: [1]
(i) An accelerated charged particles (ii) A charged particles moving with constant speed
(iii) A charge at rest. (iv) A charge either at rest or moving with constant velocity
13. In the Young double slit experiment, the fringe pattern as seen on the screen is: [1]
(i) parabola (ii) Hyperbola (iii) Ellipse (iv) Spiral
14. Which of the following has maximum stopping potential when metal is illuminated by visible light? [1]
(i) Blue (ii) Yellow (iii) Violet (iv) Red
15. The threshold wavelength for a metal having work function ϕ0 is λ0 , what is the threshold wavelength
for a metal whose work function is ϕ0 /2 . [1]
(i) 4 λ0 (ii) 2 λ0 (iii) λ0 /2 (iv) λ0 /4
16. Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]

(a)Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.


(b)Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d)A is false and R is also false.

Assertion (A): The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with temperature.


Reason (R): The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with larger amplitude at higher temperature there
by increasing its resistivity.
17.Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b)Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d)A is false and R is also false.

Assertion (A): Interference patterns are made by using blue light instead of red light, the fringes
become narrower.
Reason (R): In Young’s double slit experiment, fringe width is given by relation
𝛽=
18.Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a)Both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b)Both A & R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d)A is false and R is also false.

Assertion (A): In a non- uniform electric field, a dipole will have translatory as well as rotatory
motion.
Reason (R): In a non- uniform electric field, a dipole experiences a force as well as torque.
Page-28
SECTION-B
19. Find the current from the battery in the circuit diagram shown? [2]

20. Suppose that the electric field part of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is
E = {(3.1 N/C) cos [(1.8 rad/m) y + (5.4 × 106 rad/s)t]} ˆi . [2]
(a) What is the direction of propagation?
(b) What is the wavelength λ ?
(c) What is the frequency ν ?
(d) What is the amplitude of the magnetic field part of the wave?
21. A nucleus with mass number A = 240 and BE/A = 7.6 MeV breaks into two fragments each of
A = 120 with BE/A = 8.5 MeV. Calculate the released energy. [2]
22. The ratio of intensities at maxima and minima is 25:16. What will be the ratio of width of the two slits
in Young’s double slit experiment? [2]

OR
In the figure given below SS2- SS1 = λ/4.
(i)State the condition of constructive and
destructive interference.
(ii)Obtain the expression of fringe width. [2]

23. How does the power of a convex lens vary, if the incident red light is replaced by violet light? [2]
24. The figure shows a piece of pure semiconductor S in series with a variable resistor R and a source of
constant voltage V. Should the value of R be increased or decreased to keep the reading of the ammeter
constant, when semiconductor S is heated? Justify your answer . [2]

OR
The graph of potential barrier versus width of depletion region for an unbiased diode is shown in graph
A.In comparison to A, graphs B and C are obtained after biasing the diode in different ways .
Identify the type of biasing in B and C and justify your answer. [2]

25. Draw the equipotential surfaces of two identical positive charges. [2]
Page-29
SECTION-C
26. (a)Current in a circuit falls from 5.0 A to 0.0 A in 0.1 s. If an average emf of 200 V induced, give an
estimate of the self-inductance of the circuit.
(b) Lenz’s law is in accordance with law of conservation of energy. Justify. [3]
OR
(a)A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0
to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with the other coil?
(b). State lenz’s law. [3]
27. Plot a graph showing variation of de Broglie wavelength (λ) associated with a charged particle of
mass m, versus , where V is the potential difference through which the particle is accelerated.

How does this graph give us the information regarding the magnitude of the charge of the particles?[3]
28. Find the ratio between the wavelengths of the ‘most energetic’ spectral lines in the Balmer and
Paschen series of the hydrogen spectrum. [3]

29. A network of resistors is connected to a 16 V battery with internal resistance of 1Ω, as shown in figure
(a) Find the current in the resistor of resistance 4Ω.
(b) Obtain the voltage drops VAB and VBC . [3]

OR
Determine the currents in each branch of the network shown below. [3]

30. A device ‘X’ is connected to an a.c source.


The variation of voltage, current and power in one
complete cycle is shown in figure.
(a) Which curve shows power consumption
over a full cycle?
(b) What is the average power consumption
over a cycle?
(c) Identify the device ‘X’. [3]

Page-30
SECTION-D
31.(i)Deduce the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor when a dielectric slab is
inserted between its plates. Assume the slab thickness less than the plate separation.
(ii) Derive an expression for the energy density of an electric field. [5]
OR
(i) State Gauss theorem of electrostatic.
(ii) Apply Gauss theorem to show that for a spherical shell, the electric field inside the shell vanishes,
whereas outside it, the field is as if all charge had been concentrated at the centre. [5]
(iii)Draw the variation of electric field (E) with distance (r) for a uniformly charged spherical shell .
32.(i) Discuss the motion of a charged particle in a uniform magnetic field with initial velocity
perpendicular to the magnetic field. Find expression for radius and frequency of revolution of a
charged particle.
(ii)Write the expression for the force per unit length between two infinitely long straight parallel current
carrying wires. Hence define one ampere. [5]
OR
(i)Draw a labeled diagram of moving coil galvanometer. Describe briefly its principle and working.
(ii)Answer the following :
(a)Why is it necessary to introduce a cylindrical soft iron core inside the coil of a galvanometer?
(b)Increasing the current sensitivity of a galvanometer may not necessarily increase its voltage
sensitivity. Explain, giving reason. [5]
33. (i) Draw a ray diagram to show the working of a compound microscope. Deduce an expression for the
total magnification when the final image is formed at the near point.
(ii) The total magnification produced by a compound microscope is 20. The magnification produced
by the eye piece is 5. The microscope is focused on a certain object. The distance between the
objective and eyepiece is observed to be 14 cm. if least distance of distinct vision is 20 cm,
calculate the focal length of the objective and the eye piece. [5]
OR
(i)Derive the expression for the refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of the angle of
the prism and angle of minimum deviation.
(ii)A ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism, such that the angle of incidence is equal to
the angle of emergence. If the angle of emergence is ¾ times the angle of the prism, calculate the
refractive index of the glass prism. [5]
SECTION -E
Case based
34. Full Wave Rectifier
The process of converting alternating
voltage/current into direct
voltage/current is called rectification.
Diode is used as a rectifier for
converting alternating current/voltage
into direct current/voltage. Diode allows
current to pass only, when it is forward
biased. So, if an alternating voltage is
applied across a diode, the current flows
only in that part of the cycle when the
diode is forward biased. This property is
used to rectify the current/voltage.

Page-31
(i) If in a p-n junction, a square input signal of 10 V is applied as shown. Then draw the output wave
form across RL of the circuit shown? [1]

(ii)In the given circuit, what is the role of Capacitor C ? [1]

(iii) Draw the barrier potential diagram for PN junction in


(a)Forward biased and in (b) Reversed biased. [2]
OR
(iii) In case of PN junction biasing what is
(a)Cut-in voltage and (b)Break down voltage. [2]

35. Optical fibres: Now-a-days optical fibres are extensively used for transmitting audio and video signals
through long distances. Optical fibres
too make use of the phenomenon of
total internal reflection.
Optical fibres are fabricated with high
quality composite glass/quartz fibres.
Each fibre consists of a core and
cladding. The refractive index of the
material of the core is higher than that
of the cladding.
When a signal in the form of light is directed at one end of the fibre at a suitable angle, it undergoes repeated
total internal reflections along the length of the fibre and finally comes out at the other end

(i) Why the refractive index of the material of the core is higher than that of the cladding? [1]
(ii) Write two advantages of optical fiber. [1]
(iii) A ‘light pipe’ made of a glass fibre of refractive index 1.68. The outer covering of the pipe is made of a
material of refractive index 1.44. Find critical angle for this two pair of media. [2]
OR
(iii) Find the value of critical angle if there is no outer covering of the pipe and the refractive index of the
core is 2? [2]

Page-32
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-3)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 iv 1
2 iv 1
3 ii 1
4 iii 1
5 ii 1
6 iii 1
7 ii 1
8 iii 1
9 iv 1
10 i 1
11 ii 1
12 i 1
13 ii 1
14 iii 1
15 ii 1
16 c 1
17 a 1
18 a 1

19 1+1
I= =1A ( 𝑅 = 15 Ω ,V = 15 V )
(a) Negative Y- axis
(b) 3.5 m
20 0.5x4=2
(c) 0.86 MHz
(d) 10 nT
Binding energy of nucleus with mass number 240,
Ebn = 240 × 7.6 MeV
21 2
Binding energy of two fragments = 2 × 120 × 8.5 MeV
Energy released = 240(8.5 – 7.6) MeV = 240 × 0.9 = 216 MeV
2
81:1
OR
OR
22 (a) Condition for constructive interference xn = (4n-1) 1
Condition for destructive interference xn = (4n+1)
1
(b) Fringe width, β =
Power of convex Lens increases 1
23
Because P α (µ -1) and µv > µR 1
To keep the reading of ammeter constant value of R should be increased as with the
increase in temperature of a semiconductor, its resistance decreases and current tends
2
to increase.
OR
OR
B - reverse biased
24
In the case of reverse biased diode the potential barrier becomes higher as the battery
½
further raises the potential of the n side.
½
C -forward biased
½
Due to forward bias connection the potential of P side is raised and hence the height
½
of the potential barrier decreases.
Page-33
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

25 2

− = .
=50 1

L=

= = 4H 1

Lenz’Law- The polarity of induced emf is such that it tends to produce a current 1
which opposes the change in magnetic flux that produced it. OR
26
OR 1
di=(20-0)=20A/s
1
dφ=MXdi=1.5X20 =30 Wb
1
According to Lenz’s law to continue induced emf,external work is to be done against
opposition.This mechanical energy appears in theform of electrical energy.
Plot of the graph showing the variation of λ vs

Information regarding magnitude of charge 1
λ=
1
27
= = Slope 1
( )

q= ( )
Graph closer to axis having more value of charge

 B E3 1.51eV 4 1
   0.444 
28  P E 2 3.4eV 9 1
Rutherford model unable to explain Stability of atom and line spectra of hydrogen 1
atom
(a)Current in 4Ω resistors =1A 1
(b) VAB =4V 1
, VBC =2V 1
OR OR
Due to symmetry current in branch CA = I , in AB and DC is same = I1, in AD and 1
29
BC is same = I-I1 .So in BD IS 2I1-I
Using Kirchhoff’s law in the loop ABDA , -10 I1-5 (2I1-I)+5 (I-I1)=0 ………(1) ½
In the loop ADCEA -5(I-I1) -10 I1+ 10 -10 I= 0…………(2) ½
solving equation 1 &2
IAB =4A/17, IBC-=6A/17, ICD=-4A/17, IAD=6/17, IBD=-2A/17 and I=10A/17 1
(𝑎) A 1
30 (b) 0 1
(c ) Capacitor /Inductor 1
Page-34
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i) The net electric field is given by 𝐸⃗ = 𝐸⃗ − 𝐸 ⃗

The potenial difference between the plates is V=(d-t)E0+ Et , 1


Here 𝐸 = and 𝐸 = =
V=(d-t)E0+ 𝑡𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 − 𝑡 + 𝑉 = [𝑑 − 𝑡 + ] 1

Capacitance of the capacitor is given by 𝐶 = = 1


( )
(ii)Energy stored in a capacitor = = × Again 𝐸 =
Energy stored in the capacitor 𝑈 = 𝜖 𝐸 × 𝐴𝑑
Energy density of elecric field is 𝑢 = 𝜖 𝐸
OR OR
(i) Statement: The total flux through a closed surface is times the total charge
enclose by the closed surface. Mathematical expression:∫ 𝐸⃗ . 𝑑𝑠⃗ = 1
31 (ii)Derivation
When the point lies outside the spherical shell :
Let 𝜎 =surface charge density , charge q =4𝜋𝑅 𝜎
flux 𝜑 = 𝐸 × 4𝜋𝑟
2
From Gauss law 𝜑 =
𝐸 × 4𝜋𝑟 = 𝐸 =  𝐸⃗ = 𝑟̂
Hence for points outside the shell the field due to
uniformly charged shell is concentrated at its center.
When the point lies inside the shell:
Here q=0
Flux 𝜑 = 𝐸 × 4𝜋𝑟
From Gauss law 𝜑 = 1
𝐸 × 4𝜋𝑟 = 0
⇒ 𝐸⃗ = 0
Hence the field due to uniformly charged spherical shell
is zero at all points inside the shell.

(iii)
1

Page-35
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i) Diagram
½
Magnetic force= Centripetal force
𝑞𝑣𝐵 = ⇒𝑟=
Time period, 𝑇 = = × =
2
Frequency, 𝑓 = =
(ii) 𝑓= =
The ampere is the value of that steady current which, when maintained in each of the 1.5
two very long, straight, parallel conductors of negligible cross-section, and placed one
metre apart in vacuum, would produce on each of these conductors a force equal to 2 ×
10–7 newtons per metre of length. 1
OR
(i) Principle: When a current carrying loop OR
placed in a uniform magnetic field, it
experiences a torque. ½
32 Diagram:
Working :let us consider a rectangular coil for
which no of turns =N ½
area of cross-section, 𝐴 = 𝑙 × 𝑏 ,
current =I, 2
Deflecting torque=𝐵𝐿𝐼 × 𝑏 = 𝐵𝐼𝐴
For N turns 𝜏 = 𝑁𝐵𝐼𝐴
Restoring torque in the spring =kθ
⇒ 𝑁𝐵𝐼𝐴 = kθ
⇒ 𝐼=( )θ
⇒𝐼∝θ
(ii) (a)The soft iron core not only makes the field radial but also increases the strength of
magnetic field.
(b) current sensitivity= = 1
Voltage sensitivity= = = .
It follows that an increase in current sensitivity may not necessarily increase the voltage 1
sensitivity
( compound microscope diagram) 1

Expression for total magnification: 1


hI L D
mo=  me = ( 1 + )
h f0 fe
Total magnification
33 L D 1
m = mo x me = (1+ )
f0 fe
Problem :
𝑚 = −20, 𝑚 = 5, 𝑣 = −20 𝑐𝑚 𝑚 = ⇒ 𝑈 = −4 𝑐𝑚 1
𝑈𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑎 𝑤𝑒 𝑔𝑒𝑡
𝑓 = 5𝑐𝑚 𝑚 = 𝑚 𝑋 𝑚 ⇒ 𝑚 = −4 𝑉 = 14 − 4 = 10 𝑐𝑚 𝑚 = 1 −
1
⇒ 𝑓 = 2 𝑐𝑚
Page-36
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR
1

(i)

A +QNR = 1800
r1 + r2 + QNR = 1800 r1 + r2 = A
1
 = (i - r1) + (e - r2)  = i + e – A
At  = Dm , i = e  r1 = r2
2r = A  r =
Dm = 2i – A  i = ( )

n= = 1

(ii) Given 𝑖 = 𝑒 = 𝐴
𝐴+𝛿 =𝑖+𝑒 1
60 + 𝛿 = 45 + 45
𝛿 = 90 − 60 = 30°
°
𝜇= = = √2. 1
°

1
(i)
1

1+1

(ii) Capacitor act as filter circuit.


(iii) (a) (b)

34

OR
OR 1
(iii) (a) The minimum forward voltage at which the PN junction breaks and the current
flows in the forward direction is called as cut-in voltage. 1
(b) The minimum reverse voltage at which the PN junction breaks and the current flows
in the reverse direction is called as break down voltage.
35 (i) to satisfy one of the condition of total internal reflection. 1
(ii)(a)light can travel in curved path (optical fiber)(b)less loss in intensity of light 1
signal(c)many signal can be transmitted simultaneously 2
(iii) ic = sin-1(n2/n1) = sin-1(1.44/1.68) = sin-1(0.8571) = 590 OR
OR 2
(iii) ic = sin-1(1/n) = sin-1(1/1.68) = sin-1(0.595) = 36.50
Page-37
SAMPLE PAPER -4
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. If the de-Broglie wavelengths for a proton and for a 𝛼-particle are equal, then the ratio of their velocities
will be: [1]
(i) 4 : 1 (ii) 2 : 1 (iii) 1 : 2 (iv)1 : 4

2. In the absence of other conductors, the surface charge density [1]


(i)is proportional to the charge on the conductor and its surface area
(ii)inversely proportional to the charge and directly proportional to the surface area
(iii)directly proportional to the charge and inversely proportional to the surface area
(iv)inversely proportional to the charge and the surface area

3. The figure shows different graphs between stopping potential Vo and frequency () for photosensitive
surface of cesium, potassium, sodium and lithium. The plots are parallel.Correct ranking of the targets
according to their work function greatest first will be: [1]
V0

5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 


(1014 Hz)
[i] (i) > (ii) > (iii) > (iv) [ii] (i) > (iii) > (ii) > (iv)
[iii] (iv) > (iii) > (ii) > (i) [iv] (i) = (iii) > (ii) = (iv)

4. By a cell a current of 0.9 A flows through 2-ohm resistor and 0.3 A through 7-ohm resistor. The internal
resistance of the cell is: [1]
(i)0.5Ω (ii)1.0Ω (iii)1.2Ω (iv)2.0Ω

5. A silver wire has a resistance of 2.1 Ω at 27.5 °C, and a resistance of 2.7 Ω at 100 °C. What is the
temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver in 0c-1? [1]
(i)0.0059 (ii)0.0039 (iii)0.0129 (iv)0.0159
Page-38
6.An infinitely long straight conductor is bent into the shape as shown in the figure. It carries a current of i
ampere and the radius of the circular loop is r metre. Then the magnetic induction at its centre will be [1]
(i) (𝜋 + 1)
r
(ii) (𝜋 − 1)
O
i
(iii) Zero
(iv)Infinite
7. When green light is incident on the surface of metal, it emits photo-electrons but there is no such
emission with yellow colour light. Which one of the colour can produce emission of photo-electrons.[1]
(i)Orange (ii)Red (iii)Indigo (iv)None of the above

8. Highly energetic electrons are bombarded on a target of an element containing 30 neutrons. The ratio of
radii of nucleus to that of Helium nucleus is 141/3. The atomic number of nucleus will be: [1]
(i)25 (ii)26 (iii)56 (iv)30
9. The intrinsic semiconductor becomes an insulator at : [1]
(i) 00C (ii) -1000C (iii) 300K (iv) 0K
10. A semiconductor device is connected in a series circuit with a battery and a resistance. A current is
found to pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is reversed, the current drops almost to
zero. The device may be: [1]
(i)A P-type semiconductor (ii) An N-type semiconductor
(iii)A PN-junction (iv) An intrinsic semiconductor
11. The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given as
By = (8 × 10-6) sin [2 × 1011t+ 300πx] T, wavelength of the em wave is: [1]
(i) 0.80 cm (ii) 1 × 103m (iii) 2 × 10-2cm (iv) 0.67 cm
12. The condition under which a microwave oven heats up a food item containing water molecules most
efficiently is: [1]
(i) The frequency of the microwaves must match the resonant frequency of the water molecules.
(ii) The frequency of the microwaves has no relation with natural frequency of the water molecules.
(iii) Microwaves are heat waves, so always produce heating.
(iv) Infrared waves produce heating in a microwave oven.

13. A convex lens is dipped in a liquid, whose R.I. is equal to that of R.I. of material of the lens. Then its
focal length will: [1]
(i) become zero (ii) become infinite (iii) reduce (iv) increase

14. How can the fringe width increase in Young’s double-slit experiment? [1]
(i)By decreasing the width of the slit
(ii)By reducing the separation of slits
(iii)By reducing the wavelength of the slits
(iv)By decreasing the distance between slits and the screen

15. A single slit diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light .What happened if the red light is
replaced by the blue light? [1]
(i) There is no change in diffraction pattern
(ii) Diffraction fringes become narrower and crowded
(iii) Diffraction fringes become broader and farther apart
(iv) The diffraction pattern disappears
Page-39
16. Given two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R) Select the most appropriate answer
from the options given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion : On disturbing an electric dipole in stable equilibrium in uniform electric field, it
returns back to its stable equilibrium orientation.
Reason : A restoring torque acts on the dipole on being disturbed from its stable equilibrium.
17. Given two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R) Select the most appropriate
answer from the options given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion: The resistivity of a semiconductor increases with temperature.
Reason :The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with larger amplitude at higher temperature there by
increasing it's resistivity.
18. Given two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R) Select the most appropriate
answer from the options given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c)A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion: In series LCR resonance circuit, the impedance is equal to the ohmic resistance.
Reason: At resonance, the inductive reactance exceeds the capacitive reactance.

SECTION-B

19. Plot the graphs of the energy of a capacitor varying with its capacitance when
(a) charge is constant, and
(b) potential difference is constant. [2]
OR
Three-point charges, +Q, + 2Q and –3Q are placed at the
vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of side l.If these charges
are displaced to the mid-points A1, B1 and C1 respectively,
find the amount of the work done in shifting the charges
to the new locations. [2]

20. The relative magnetic permeability of a magnetic material is 800. Identify the nature of magnetic
material and state its two properties. [2]
21. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to obtain conditions for the balance condition in a Wheatstone bridge. [2]
22. An electric lamp having coil of negligible inductance
connected in series with a capacitor and an a.c. source. The lamp is
glowing with certain brightness. How does the brightness
of the lamp will change on reducing the
(i)capacitance, and
(ii) the frequency? Justify your Answer [2]

Page-40
23. (i)Draw a ray diagram of a reflecting type telescope.
(ii)State two advantages of this telescope over a refracting telescope. [2]
OR
Two monochromatic rays of light are incident normally on
the face AB of an isosceles right angled prism ABC. The
refractive indices of the glass prism for the two rays
‘1’ and ‘2’ are respectively 1.35 and 1.45. Trace the path
of these rays entering through the prism. [2]

24. Plot a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with the frequency of incident radiation for two
different photosensitive materials having work functions W1 and W2 (W1 > W2). On what factors does
the (i) slope and
(ii) intercept of the lines depend? [2]
25. Write the distinguishing features between a diffraction pattern due to a single slit and the interference
fringes produced in Young’s double slit experiment. [2]
SECTION-C
26. Explain the term ‘drift velocity’ of electrons in a conductor. Hence obtain the expression for the current
through a conductor in terms of ‘drift velocity’. [3]

27. An electron of mass m and charge q is accelerated from rest through a potential difference of V. Obtain
the expression for the de-Broglie wavelength associated with it. If electrons and protons are moving with
the same kinetic energy, which one of them will have a larger de-Broglie wavelength associated with it?
Give reason. [3]

28. Derive the expression for force per unit length between two long straight parallel current carrying
conductors. Hence define SI unit of current. [3]

29. Write three possible causes of energy loss in a transformer. How are these minimised? [3]
OR
Obtain the expression for the magnetic energy stored in an ideal inductor of self-inductance L when a
current I pass through it. Hence obtain the expression for the energy density of magnetic field B produced
in the inductor. [3]

30. (a)Using Bohr’s second postulate of quantization of orbital angular momentum show that the
circumference of the electron in the nth orbital state in hydrogen atom is n times the de-Broglie
wavelength associated with it.
(b) The electron in hydrogen atom is initially in the third excited state. What is the maximum number of
spectral lines which can be emitted when it finally moves to the ground state? [3]
OR
Draw a plot showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon versus the mass number (A). Explain
with the help of this plot the release of energy in the processes of nuclear fission and fusion. [3]

SECTION-D

31.(a)Write two properties of equipotential surfaces. Depict equipotential surfaces due to an isolated point
charge. Why do the equipotential surfaces get closer as the distance between the equipotential
surface and the source charge decreases?
(b)An electric dipole of dipole moment p⃗, is placed in a uniform electric field E⃗, Deduce the expression
for the potential energy with the dipole . [5]
Page-41
OR
(a)Derive the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor having two identical plates
each of area A and separated by a distance d, when the space between the plates is filled by a
dielectric medium?
(b)X and Y are two parallel plate capacitors having same plate area and same separation between the
plates are connected in series with a potential difference of 12V. X has air between the plates and
Y contains a dielectric medium of 𝜀 = 4.
(i)Calculate the capacitance of each capacitor if equivalent capacitance of the combination is 4𝜇F.
(ii)What is the ratio of electrostatic energy stored in X and Y? [5]
32. (a) Using Biot- Savart Law, deduce an expression for the magnetic field on the axis of a circular current
loop.
(b) Draw the magnetic field lines due to a current carrying loop.
(c) A straight wire carrying a current of 12 A is bent into a
semi-circular arc of radius 2.0 cm as shown.
What is the magnetic field B at O due to
(i) straight segments (ii) the semi-circular arc? [5]

OR
Explain, using a labelled diagram, the principle and working of a moving coil galvanometer.
(a) What is the function of
(i) uniform radial magnetic field,
(ii) Cylindrical soft iron core?
(b) Define the terms
(i) current sensitivity and
(ii) voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer.
Why does increasing the current sensitivity not necessarily increase voltage sensitivity? [5]
33. Draw the labelled ray diagram for the formation of image by a compound microscope. Define and derive
the expression for its magnifying power when the image is formed at infinity. Explain why both the
objective and the eye piece of a compound microscope must have short focal lengths. [5]
OR
(a)Trace the rays of light showing the formation of an image due to a point object placed on the axis of a
spherical surface separating the two media of refractive indices n1 and n2. Establish the relation between
the distances of the object, the image and the radius of curvature from the central point of the spherical
surface.
(b)An unsymmetrical double convex lens forms the image of a point object on its axis. Will the position
of the image change if the lens is reversed? Explain. [5]
34. READ THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AND ANSWER THE QUESTIONS
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
Before the development of silicon semiconductor rectifiers, vacuum
tube thermionic diodes and copper oxide- or selenium-based metal
rectifier stacks were used. With the introduction of semiconductor
electronics, vacuum tube rectifiers became obsolete, except for some
enthusiasts of vacuum tube audio equipment. For power rectification from
very low to very high current, semiconductor diodes of various types
(junction diodes, Schottky diodes, etc.) are widely used. Other devices that
have control electrodes as well as acting as unidirectional current valves are used where more than simple
rectification is required—e.g., where variable output voltage is needed. High-power rectifiers, such as
those used in high-voltage direct current power transmission, employ silicon semiconductor devices of
various types. These are thyristors or other controlled switching solid-state switches, which effectively
function as diodes to pass current in only one direction.
Page-42
(i) What happens to the width of depletion layer of a p-n junction when it is [1]
(a)forward biased?
(b) reverse biased?
(ii)In the circuit given below, find the value of the current. PN [1]
300 + 1V
+ 4V

(iii)Explain, how a depletion region is formed in a junction diode? [2]


OR
Draw a labelled diagram of a full -wave rectifier circuit. Show the input-output wave forms [2]

35.READ THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AND ANSWER THE QUESTIONS

RAINBOW COLOURS ON SOAP BUBBLE:

An optical medium is called a thin film when its


thickness is about the order of one wavelength of light
in visible region (0.5 𝜇𝑚 to 10 𝜇𝑚). A thin film may be
a thin sheet of transparent material such as glass, mica,
an air film enclosed between two transparent plates or a
soap bubbles. When light is incident on such a film, a
smaller part of it gets reflected from the top surface
and a major part is transmitted into the film. Again, a
small part of the transmitted component is reflected
back into the film by the bottom surface and the rest of it emerges out of the film. The reflected ray
(Ray -1) and the refracted ray (Ray -2) overlap and produce interference. Hence, we see soap
bubbles exhibiting different colours in different directions.
(i) Two waves of intensity I undergo Interference. Find the maximum intensity obtained. [1]
(ii)If yellow light in the Young's double slit experiment is replaced by red light, what happens to
the fringe width? [1]
(iii)In Young's double slit experiment, if L is the distance between the slits and the screen upon which
interference pattern is observed, x is the average distance between the adjacent fringes and d being
the slit separation. Find the wavelength of light. [2]
OR
In a double-slit experiment using the light of wavelength 600 nm, the angular width of the fringe
formed on a distant screen is 0.10. Find the spacing between the two slits. [2]

Page-43
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-4)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 i 1
2 iii 1
3 iii 1
4 i 1
5 ii 1
6 ii 1
7 iii 1
8 ii 1
9 iv 1
10 iii 1
11 iv 1
12 i 1
13 ii 1
14 ii 1
15 ii 1
16 a 1
17 d 1
18 c 1
1
1

OR
Electrostatic potential energy of the systems of charges corresponding to initial OR
configuration is
19
1

Electrostatic potential energy of the system of charges corresponding to final


configuration is

The amount of work done in shifting the charges to new locations is 1

Substance is ferromagnetic.
Its properties are
(a)They are strongly attracted by magnets. 1
20
1
(b)In a non-uniform magnetic field, they tend to move quickly from weaker to
stronger parts of the field.
Page-44
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Conditions for the balance condition in a Wheatstone bridge:

Applying Kirchhoff’s loop rule to closed loop ADBA,


21
½

1/2

This is the required balance condition in a Wheatstone bridge arrangement.


Brightness of lamp ∝ I0,
Assuming zero resistance and zero inductance of lamp
1
22
1
On reducing C or ; It would decrease
∴ Brightness of the lamp will decrease.
1

(ii) Advantages of reflecting telescope over a refracting telescope (any two)


1.Due to large aperture of the mirror used, the reflecting telescopes have high
resolving power. ½+1/2
23 2.This type of telescope is free from chromatic aberration (formation of coloured
image of a white object).
3.The use of paraboloidal mirror reduces the spherical aberration (formation of non-
point, blurred image of a point object).
4.Image formed by reflecting telescope is brighter than refracting telescope.
5.A lens of large aperture tends to be very heavy and therefore difficult to make and
support by its edges. On the other hand, a mirror of equivalent optical quality weights
less and can be supported over its entire back surface.
OR OR
(i)Ray 1 will suffer refraction
(ii)Ray 2 will suffer TIR 1
1
Page-45
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

24

Interference Diffraction

Interference is due to
1. superposition of two Diffraction is due to superposition of the
distinct waves coming secondary wavelets coming from different
from two coherent parts of the same wavefront.
sources.

2.
All maxima are of same Width of central maxima is twice the
25 width. width of secondary maxima
1+1
3.
First maxima is at
First minima is at angular position λ/a
angular position λ/d

4.
All bright fringes are of Intensity of bright fringe decreases with
uniform intensity. increase with order.

Difference between interference and diffraction of light

Definition of drift velocity 1


26 Derivation of I= n e AVd 2
Page-46
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Consider an electron of mass m and charge e to be accelerated through a potential
difference of V volts. Let v be the velocity gained by it. Then kinetic energy of the
electron is

If λ is the de-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron, then


27

1.227nm 2

V 1
Since de-Broglie wavelength is inversely proportional to the square root of mass, the
lesser the mass, the more is the de- Broglie wavelength. Since the mass of an electron
is lesser than that of the proton, the electron has a greater de-Broglie wavelength than
a proton.
Consider two infinitely long parallel conductors carrying current I1 and I2 in the same
direction.
Let d be the distance of separation between these two conductors.
2

28

Hence, force is attractive in nature.


Ampere: Ampere is that current which is if maintained in two infinitely long parallel 1
conductors of negligible cross-sectional area separated by 1 metre in vacuum causes a
force of 2 × 10-7 N on each metre of the other wire.
Then current flowing is 1A.
(Any three)
The possible causes of energy losses in transformers are:
(a) Flux leakage: There is always some flux leakage. It can be reduced by winding the 1
primary and secondary coils one over the other.
(b) Copper: The copper wires used for the windings have some resistance and hence
some energy is lost due to heat produced in the wire. It can be minimised by taking
thick wire.
29
(c) Eddy currents: The alternating magnetic flux induces eddy currents in the iron 1
core, which results in loss of electrical energy. To minimise it we use a laminated iron
core.
(d) Hysteresis loss: As the magnetisation cycle of the iron core is repeated again and
again, some loss of energy takes place due to magnetic hysteresis. To minimise it we 1
prefer a soft iron core for which hysteresis loss is less.

Page-47
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR
Expression for Magnetic Energy density in an ideal inductor:
Instantaneous induced emf in an inductor when current changes through it
Hence instantaneous applied voltage

Putting the values of (LI) and (I) from equations (ii) and (iii) in equation (i), we have

(a) According to the de-Broglie hypothesis, this electron is


also associated with wave character.
According to Bohr’s-second postulate

Hence the circumference of the electron in the nth orbital 2


state in hydrogen atom is n times the de-Broglie wavelength associated with it.
(b) For third excited state n = 4
30 For ground state n = 1
Hence, possible transitions are : ni=4 to nf=3,2,1 ni=3 to nf=2,1
ni=2 to nf=1 so total no. of transitions =6
No of transition = n (n-1)/2 = 4 x 3/2=6 1
OR
OR

Page-48
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1. Nuclear fission : Binding energy per nucleon is smaller for heavier nuclei than the
middle ones i.e. heavier nuclei are less stable. When a heavier nucleus splits into the
lighter nuclei, the B.E./nucleon changes (increases) from about 7.6 MeV to 8.4 MeV. 1
Greater binding energy of the product nuclei results in the liberation of energy. This is
what happens in nuclear fission which is the basis of the atom bomb.

2. Nuclear fusion : The binding energy per nucleon is small for light nuclei, i.e., they are
less stable. So when two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus, the higher 1
binding energy per nucleon of the latter results in the release of energy.
(a) Properties of equipotential surfaces (ANY TWO) ½+1/2
(i) No work is done in moving a test charge over an equipotential surface.
(ii) No two equipotential surfaces can inter-sect each other.
(iii) Equipotential surface due to an isolated point charge is spherical.
(iv) The electric field at every point is normal to the equipotential surface
passing through that point.
1
Equipotential surface due to an isolated charge

1
For the same change in the value ’V’ i.e., when dV = constant,
we have dr ∝1/E
Hence, equipotential surface gets closer as the distance between the equipotential
surface and the source charge decreases.

(b) Consider a dipole with charges +q and -q


placed in a uniform electric field E such that
31 AB = 2a as shown in the figure

Since the dipole experiences no net force in a


uniform electric field but experiences a torque 2
(τ) is given by

It tends to rotate the dipole in clockwise direction. To rotate the dipole anti-clock wise
has to be done on the dipole.
OR OR
Diagram 1/2
Derivation
1.5
(i) Cx= 5𝜇𝐹
Cy=20𝜇𝐹
1
(i)Calculation of UX:UY= 4:1 1
1
Page-49
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a) Derivation 2
(b) Diagram
(c ) (i) 0 1
(ii)1.9 ×10-4 T 1+1
OR OR
Principle : “If a current carrying coil is freely suspended/pivoted in a uniform magnetic field, it
experiences a deflecting torque.”
Working: As the pivoted coil is
1/2
placed in a radial magnetic
field, hence on passing current
I through it, a deflecting torque
acts on the coil which is given
by, τ = NAIB 1
Where N = total number of
turns in the coil
A=Area of coil,

B=magnetic field
The spring Sp attached to the coil provides the counter torque and in equilibrium state balances
the deflecting torque. If φ is steady angular deflection then counter torque is kφ. where [k =
torsional constant of the spring]
In equilibrium state,
Thus, deflection is directly proportional to the current flowing in the coil.
32 (a) (i) Uniform radial magnetic field. It 1/2
keeps the magnetic field line normal to
the area vector of the coil for any
orientation of coil.
(ii) Cylindrical Soft iron core in galvanometer. The cylindrical soft iron core, when placed
inside the coil of a galvanometer, makes the magnetic field stronger and radial in the space
between it and pole pieces, such that whatever the position of the rotation of the coil may be, the
magnetic field is always parallel to its plane.
(b) (i) Current sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced in the galvanometer when unit
current is passed through its coil.

½
½
(ii) Voltage sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced in the galvanometer when unit
voltage is applied across the coil of the galvanometer.

½
where [R = Resistance of the coil

does not necessarily increase the

voltage sensitivity. It may be affected by the resistance use ½

1
Page-50
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Ray diagram of compound microscope
Definition of magnifying power 1
Derivation of magnifying power ½
Correct reason 2½
OR 1
(a) Derivation of the formula
OR
33
3
Diagram ½
(b) No ½
Reason- On reversing the surfaces of lens, value of RI remains same and value of 1
R1,R2 along with sign interchanged resulting no change in focal length .
(i) (a)Width of depletion layer’s decreases in forward bias
(b) Width depletion layer increases in reverse bias. 1/2
(ii) Current flow is possible and ½
V (4  1)
i   10  2 A 1
R 300
(iii) With the formation of p-n junction, the holes from p-region diffuse into the
n-region and electrons from n-region diffuse into p-region and electron-hole 2
pair combine and get annihilated.
This input produces potential barrier, VB across in junction which opposes
the further diffusion through the junction. Thus, small region forms in the OR
vicinity of the junction which is depleted of free charge carrier and has only
immobile ions is called the depletion region.
OR 1

34

Page-51
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
For maximum intensity   0

I1 I2 cos   I  I  2 I I cos 0  4 I
 I  I1  I2  2 1
Increases
D 1
( )   
Fringe width d
red  yellow,
As hence fringe width will increase. 1+1
D
 
We know that fringe width d
L xd
x  
35 d L

OR OR

1+1

Page-52
SAMPLE PAPER -5
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. A thin glass (RI = 3/2) lens has optical power of – 5D in air. Its optical power in a liquid medium with RI
= 1.6 will be: [1]
(i) -2.5 D (ii) 25 D (iii) –ID (iv) 0.625 D
2. Figure shows the tracks of three charged particles in a uniform electric field moving with same speed.
Which particle has the largest charge to mass ratio? [1]
(i) 1
(ii) 2
(iii) 3
(iv) 1 & 3 both

3. An electric dipole kept in a non-uniform electric field making angle θ (not 00 or not 1800) may experience:
- [1]
(i) Only a torque (ii) Only a force (iii) A force and a torque (iv) None of the above

4. How would the angular separation of interference fringes in Young’s double slit experiment changes
when the distance between the slits and screen is doubled? [1]
(i) Remain same (ii) Becoming half (iii) Become double (iv)Cannot be determined
5. A diamagnetic substance under influence of an external magnetic field has: [1]
(i) + ve and small susceptibility (ii) +ve and large susceptibility
(iii) -ve and small susceptibility (iv) Zero susceptibility
6. Which of following radiation are used detect forged documents? [1]
(i) X –ray (ii) Infra-Red (iii)Visible (iv) Ultra violet.
7. What is the frequency of output signal of full wave rectifier if the frequency input signal is 50 Hz? [1]
(i) 50 Hz (ii) 25 Hz (iii) 100 Hz (iv) 0 Hz

8. In an electrical circuit R, L, C and an a.c. voltage source are all connected in series. When L is removed
from the circuit, the phase difference between the voltage and the current in the circuit is π /4. If instead,
C is removed from the circuit the phase difference is again become π/4. The impedance of the circuit when
all elements are present is : [1]
(i) 𝑅 + (𝑋𝑙 − 𝑋𝑐) (ii) R (iii) (𝑋𝑙 − 𝑋𝑐) (iv) 0
Page-53
9. The energy level diagram of an element is given [1]
below. Identify, by doing necessary calculations,
which transition corresponds to the emission
of a spectral line of wavelength 102.7 nm?
(i) A (ii) B (iii)C (iv) D

10. The given graph shows the variation of [1]


Photo-electric current (I) versus applied voltage (V)
for two different photosensitive materials and for
two different intensities of the incident radiation.
Identify the pairs of curves that correspond to
different materials but same intensity radiation.
(i) (1,2) (3,4) (ii) (1,3) (2,4)
(iii) (1,4) (2,3) (iv)None of them.

11. A network of four capacitors of capacity C each are connected to a battery as shown in the figure. The
ratio of the charges on C1 and C4 is :– [1]
(i) 1/4
(ii) 1/3
(iii) 3/1
(iv) 4/1

12. In reverse biased connection of a P-N junction which of the following is correct? [1]
(i) Diffusion current is greater than drift current
(ii) Diffusion current is less than drift current
(iii) Diffusion current is equal to drift current
(iv)None of these
13. Which of the following information about nuclear force is not correct? [1]
(i)It is charge independent (ii) It is short range force
(iii)It is strongest force in nature (iv) It follow inverse square law
14.Which of the following I-V characteristic represent the V~ I characteristic of a semiconductor
device? [1]

(i) A (ii)B (iii)C (iv)D


15. The electric field intensity E, current density J and conductance σ are related to each other through the
relation [1]
(i) E = J/ σ (ii) E = J σ (iii) E = σ /J (iv) σ = J E2

Page-54
16. Two statements are given one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled as Reason( R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from code (a) ,(b) , (c) and (d) as given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and the R is the correct explanation of the A.
(b) Both the A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of the A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A) : When a bar magnet is dropped into a vertical long hollow metallic tube, the magnet
ultimately moves with an acceleration less than acceleration due to gravity.
Reason (R) : The magnet falling into metallic tube causes the induced currents in the metal tube, so the
motion of the magnet is of decreasing acceleration.
17. Two statements are given one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled as Reason( R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from code (a) ,(b) , (c) and (d) as given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and the R is the correct explanation of the A.
(b) Both the A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of the A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Electric field lines are not perpendicular to surface of charged conductor.
Reason (R): The surface of charged conductor is surface of variable potential.
18. Two statements are given one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled as Reason( R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from code (a) ,(b) , (c) and (d) as given below: [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and the R is the correct explanation of the A.
(b) Both the A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of the A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Two independent sources cannot be coherent sources.
Reason (R): The phase difference of the two independent sources at a particular point remain constant with
respect to time.
SECTION-B
19.In the circuit shown, an ideal voltmeter is used to [2]
measure the reading of the potential difference
between A and B .
What is the reading of the voltmeter?

20. The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by [2]
By= (8×10-6) sin (2 ×1011t + 300 π x )T
(i) Calculate the frequency of the electromagnetic wave
(ii) Write the expression of the oscillating electric field.
OR
Can two lamps of sodium light act as coherent sources? Give your reason?
21. An electron is accelerated by a potential difference of V. Find out the expression for de-Broglie
wavelength associated with an electron.
22. Find out the minimum magnetic moment of electron in hydrogen atom. [2]
OR
An electron does not suffer any deflection while passing along + ve x axis through a region of mutually
perpendicular uniform magnetic field (B) and electric field (E) with a velocity ‘v’
(a) What is the direction of the magnetic field if Electric field is along y axis?
(b) What is the relation between E and B? [2]
23. A star converts its hydrogen to helium in fusion reaction. It converts to helium via the
reaction: 1H2 + 1H2 1H3 + 1H1 + Q
Mass of 1H2 = 2.014102 u , 1H1 = 1.007825 u , 1H3 =3.0160 u , where 1u = 931.5 Mev /c2 [2]
24. The second member of Layman series in hydrogen spectrum has wavelength 1028 A o. Find the
Wave length of first member? [2]
Page-55
25.(a) Draw the circuit diagram of a p-n junction diode in forward bias,
(b) Draw a typical V-I characteristics in FB. [2]
SECTION-C
26. Figure shows variation of stopping potential (V0) with the
frequency (ν) for two photosensitive materials M1 and M2 .
(i) Why is the slope same for both lines?
(ii) For which material will the emitted electrons have
greater kinetic energy for same frequency of the incident radiations?
(iii) Which metal has higher work function? Justify your answer in above cases. [3]
OR
Show that the total energy (E) of the electron in the stationary states can be expressed as negative of
kinetic energy (K) . [3]
27. In the figure given below, light rays of blue, green, red wavelengths
are incident on an isosceles right-angled prism. Explain with
reason, which ray of light will be transmitted through the face AC.
The refractive index of the prism for red, green, blue light is 1.39,
1.414 & 1.476 respectively. [3]
28. Explain, with the help of a circuit diagram, the working of a p-n
junction diode as a half wave rectifier. [3]

29. A long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table as


shown in Fig. Another wire PQ of length 1m, mass 2.5 g carries
the same current but in the opposite direction. The wire PQ is
free to slide up and down. To what height will PQ rise? [3]

30. First a set of ‘ n’ equal resistors of resistance R each are connected in series to a battery of emf E and
internal resistance ‘R’. A current I is observed to flow. Than ‘n’ resistor are connected in parallel to the
same battery . It is observed that the current is increased by 10 times .What is n? [3]
OR
In the given circuit with a steady current,
calculate the potential drop across the capacitor in terms of V. [3]

SECTION-D

31. Use Gauss theorem to find electric field due to thin sheet of charge.
(a) A point charge (+Q) is kept in the vicinity of uncharged
conducting plate. Sketch electric field lines between the
charge and the plate.
(b)Two infinitely large plane thin parallel sheets having
surface charge densities ϭ1 and ϭ2 as shown in the figure.
Write the magnitudes and directions of the net fields
in the regions marked II . [5]
OR
(a) Prove that energy stored per unit volume in a capacitor is given by (1/2) ε0 E2, where E is the electric
field inside the capacitor?
(b) An air capacitor is given a charge of 2µC raising its potential to 200 V. If on inserting a dielectric
medium, its potential falls to 50 V, what is the dielectric constant of the medium? [5]
32. A coil of number of turns N, area A, is rotated at a constant angular speed ω, in a uniform magnetic field
B, and resistance R. Deduce expression for;
(i) Maximum emf induced in the coil
(ii) Power dissipation in the coil.
(iii) Plot a graph emf E~ t (time) for a complete cycle. [5]
. Page-56
OR
(a)Derive an expression for the average power consumed in a series LCR circuit connected to an a.c. source
in which the phase difference between the voltage and the current in the circuit is Ф.
(b) What is power factor in an a.c. circuit? Why should the power factor should have high value in high
power transmission? [5]
33. (i) Analytically find the condition of maxima and minima when two wave from coherent sources overlap
with each other.
(ii) Find the ratio of intensities at two points on a screen in young’s double slit experiment when waves from
the two slits have a path difference wave (a) 0 and (b) λ/4. [5]
OR
1 1 1
(a) Derive the lens formula   for a concave lens using the necessary ray diagram.
f v u
1 1 1
(b) Deduce the relation   for two thin lenses kept in contact coaxially. [5]
f f1 f 2
SECTION E
34. CASE STUDY
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
A compound microscope is an optical instrument used for observing highly magnified images of tiny
objects. Magnifying power of a compound microscope is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended at the
eye by the final image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object, when both the final image and the
objects are situated at the least distance of distinct vision from the eye. It can be given that: m = me x mo,
where me is the magnification produced by the eye lens and mo is the magnification produced by the
objective lens.
Consider a compound microscope that consists of an objective lens of focal length 2.0 cm and an eyepiece
of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm.
(i) What is the object distance for eye-piece, so that final image is formed at the least distance of distinct
vision. [1]
(ii) What is the nature of intermediate image formed by the objective of a compound microscope? [1]
(iii) What is the magnifying power of the microscope for object position is 2.5 cm in case of near vision? [2]
OR
(iii) (a)To increase the magnifying power of a compound microscope we should increase or decrease the
focal length of eyepiece.
(b)In which case, magnification of compound microscope will be more when image is formed at Infinity or
when image is formed at distance of distinct vision. [2]
35. CASE STUDY
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
The moving coil galvanometer (MCG) is a device which based
on the principle that , torque experienced by current carrying
coil placed in a uniform magnetic field. The galvanometer consists
of a
coil with many turns, free to rotate about a fixed axis in a
uniform radial magnetic field. There is a cylindrical soft iron
core which not only makes the field radial but also increases the strength of the magnetic field. When a
current flows through the coil, a torque acts on it. This torque is given by = NI AB where the symbols have
their usual meaning. Since the field is radial by design, we have taken sin θ = 1 .The magnetic torque NIAB
tends to rotate the coil. A spring Sp provides a counter torque kϕ that balances the magnetic torque NIAB;
resulting in a steady angular deflection ϕ .In equilibrium kϕ = NI AB where k is the tensional constant of the
spring; i.e. the restoring torque per unit twist. Φ = (NBA/K)I
(i) How is the magnetic field is made radial in a moving coil galvanometer? [1]
(ii)Why the spring is is made up of Phosphorous Bonze? [1]
(iii) What are two methods we can increase the voltage sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer? [2]
OR
(iii) How can we convert Galvanometer in to voltmeter? [2]
Page-57
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-5)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 iv 1
2 i 1
3 iii 1
4 i 1
5 iii 1
6 iv 1
7 iii 1
8 ii 1
9 iv 1
10 ii 1
11 ii 1
12 ii 1
13 iv 1
14 iii 1
15 i 1
16 a 1
17 d 1
18 a 1
Reqin each branch = same (20Ω), so same current in each branch(=1amp )
1
19 Req=10Ω, Veq= I Req=2X10=20V,
1
VA=20-(1X4)=16V,VB=20-(1X16 )= 4VVA-VB = 12V
(a)  = (/2) = (2x1011/2π) =3.18x1010 Hz 1
(b) Ez = (24×102) sin(2 ×1011t + 300 πx )V/m 1
20 OR OR
No . As the phase difference between two sources at a particular point is not constant 1
with respect with time. 1
𝜆= =
.
A0 1
21 √ √ 1
Magnetic moment µ =IA = eπr2 /T = (enh)/(4πm) 1
n=1 for lowest value .µ =eh/4πm =9.27X10-24Am2 1
22 OR OR
By Flemings Left hand rule magnetic field will be in +z direction. 1
E = Bv 1
23 Δm = 0.004379 u E= 0.004379 x 931.5 Mev = 4.0790 Mev. 1+1
24 =( RH )( − ) , =( RH )( − ) On dividing both λ= 1218 A0 1+1

1
Circuit diagram and graph
25
1

(i) As slope is constant for any material= h/e 1


(ii) M1 as its work function is less. 1
(iii) M2 as graph touch at higher value of frequency. 1
26 OR OR
The necessary centripetal force is equal to electrostatic force . 1
= K= = U= -  E= − =-K 1
1
Page-58
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Angle of incident is 450 for all colour is same but µ=
For Red angle incident is less than angle of critical angle so it suffer refraction and
move in to next medium.So transmitted through face AC.
27 For green angle incident is equal to angle of critical angle so it move along the 1
surface AC. 1
For blue angle incident is more than angle of critical angle so it suffer total internal 1
reflection .
Diagram 1
28
Working , Graph of input and out put 2
 I I l 4X 10 7 X 625 1
29 r 0 1 2   0.5cm 1
2mg 2X 0.0025 X 10
1
I1 = = In Series Total resistance is nR 1
( )
In parallel total resistance is R/n so 1
I2= 10I1 =I2 So by solving n= 10 1
( )
30
OR OR
By applying Kirchhoff law in loop AFEDCBA is V + IR +2IR-2V =0I=V/3R 1
By applying Kirchhoff law in loop AFEBA is V + IR +V ‘ -V =0 1
V + R +V ‘ -V =0 V ‘ =V/3 1
Derivation of Electric field due to sheet with diagram.
(a)Diagram
3
(b) EII = ( σ1 - σ2 ) /2ε0 if σ1 > σ2
1
= ( σ2 - σ1 ) /2ε0 if σ1 < σ2
1
The direction is from higher value of charge density to lower one .
31 OR
OR
3
Derivation u= 1/2 ε0 E2
1
Q=CV Q=2x10-6 x200 q
1
When dielectric is introduced Q=Kx 2x2x10-6 x50
Equalizing both K=4
Diagram ½
V= - , 𝛟=NBA Cos(t) 1
1+1/2
V = NBA Sin(t) V0 =NBA
1
(ii) Pmax = V2 0 / R = (NBA)2/ R 1
32 (iii) sin function graph.
OR OR
Derivation of power P = (∫ 𝑉𝐼 𝑆𝑖𝑛(𝑤𝑡)𝑆𝑖𝑛 (𝑤𝑡 + 𝜙)𝑑𝑡 )/T 2
On simplification P= Vrms Irms Cos 𝛟 1
cosφ is called as power factor. As it determined the power consumption in the circuit. 1
High power factors means low current so power loss will be less during transmission. 1
Derivation of I = I1 +I2 + 2(I1I2)1/2 cos φ
Maxima cos φ = +1 φ = 2nπ n= 0.1,2,3------ 1
Path difference = nλ n= 0.1,2,3------ 1
33 Minima cos φ = -1  φ = (2n-1)π n= 1,2,3------ 1
Path difference = (2n-1)λ/2 n= .1,2,3------ 1
2
I = 4I0 cos (φ/2) 1
= =2:1
Page-59
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR
Diagram 2
Derivation 1
1/f1=1/v1-1/(u1 ) 1/f2=1/v2-1/(u2 ) But Image distance of 1st lens is object 1
33
distance of 2nd lens .
So v1 = u2 so
1/f1+1/f1=1/v1-1/(u1 ) +1/v2-1/(u2 ) =1/v2-1/(u1 ) =1/f2 1

(i) = − v= -25cm , f =6.25cm  u=5cm


(ii) real, inverted and magnified 1
1
(iii) M = (1+ ) = (1+ ) =20 times 2
34 . .
OR
OR
1
(a) decrease
1
(b) When image is formed at least distance of distinct vision.

(i)Poles are cylindrically cut and core is cylindrical


1
(ii) Due to less value of torsional constant ,sensitivity increases.
1
The pointer returns to zero current position quickly.
1+1
35 (iii) By decreasing torsional constant or by increasing area of coil.
OR
OR
(iv) By using a high resistance in series with galvanometer.
2
Page-60
SAMPLE PAPER -6
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. What is the angle between electric field and equipotential surface? [1]
(i)90 always (ii) 0 always (iii) 0 𝑡𝑜 90 (iv) 0 𝑡𝑜 180
2. Two point charges A and B having charges +𝒒 and −𝒒 respectively, are placed at certain distance apart and force
acting between them is F. If 25% charge of A is transferred to B, then force between the charges becomes: [1]
𝟗𝑭 𝟏𝟔𝑭 𝟒𝑭
(i) F (ii) 𝟏𝟔 (iii) 𝟑
(iv) 𝟑
3. A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external resistor R. The graph
showing variation of P.D. across R versus R is: [1]

a b c d
(i) a (ii) b (iii) c (iv) d
4. The capacitance of a capacitor becomes times its original value if a dielectric slab of thickness 𝑡 = 𝑑
is introduced in between plates, where d is the separation between the plates. The dielectric constant of
the slab is : [1]
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
5. The materials suitable for making electromagnets should have [1]
(i)High relative permeability & High susceptibility
(ii)High relative permeability & Low susceptibility
(iii)Low relative permeability & High susceptibility
(iv)Low relative permeability & Low susceptibility
6. An ammeter reads up to 1A. Its internal resistance is 0.81Ω. To increase the range to 10A, the value
of the required shunt is : [1]
(i) 0.03Ω (ii)0.3Ω (iii) 0.9Ω (iv) 0.09Ω
Page-61
7. In a series LCR circuit, the voltage across the resistance, capacitance and inductance is 10V each.
If the capacitance is short circuited the voltage across the inductance will be: [1]
(i)10V (ii)10√2 (iii) 10 (iv) 20V
√2
8. A metallic square loop ABCD is moving in its own plane with velocity v in a uniform magnetic field
perpendicular to its plane as shown in the figure. Electric field is induced: [1]
(i) in AB, but not in BD
(ii) in BD, but not in AB
(iii) neither in AC nor in BD
(iv) in both AC and CD

9. A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 30 MHz travels in free space along x-direction.
The electric field component of the wave at a particular point of space and time is 𝐸 = 6 𝑉𝑚
along y-direction. Its magnetic field component B at this point would be: [1]
(i) 2 × 10 𝑇 along z-direction (ii) 6 × 10 𝑇 along x-direction
(iii) 2 × 10 𝑇 along y-direction (iv) 6 × 10 𝑇 along z-direction
10. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is: [1]
(i) virtual, erect and magnified (ii) real, erect and magnified
(iii) real, inverted and magnified (iv) virtual, erect and reduced
11. Yellow light is used in a single slit diffraction experiment with slit width of 0.6 mm. If yellow light is
replaced by X-rays, then the observed pattern will reveal: [1]
(i) that the central maximum is narrower. (ii) more number of fringes.
(iii) less number of fringes (iv) no diffraction pattern
12. A student measures the focal length of a convex lens by putting an object pin at a distance ‘u’ from the
lens and measuring the distance ‘v’ of the image pin. The graph between ‘u’ and ‘v’ plotted by the
student should look like: [1]

(i)
(ii)

(iii) (iv)

13. A particle of mass 1mg has the same wavelength as the electron moving with a velocity of 3×106 ms−1.
The velocity of the particle is: (mass of electron = 9.1×10 −31kg) [1]
(i) 2.7 x 10-21 m/s (ii) 2.7 x 10-18 m/s
(iii) 9 x 10-21 m/s (iv) 3 x 10-31 m/s
14. If an electron in a hydrogen atom jumps from the 3 orbit to the 2nd orbit, it emits a photon of
rd

wavelength 𝜆. When it jumps from 4th orbit to 3rd orbit, the corresponding wavelength of the photon
will be: [1]
(i) 𝜆 (ii) 𝜆 (iii) 𝜆 (iv) 𝜆
Page-62
15. If the radius of the 𝐴𝑙 nucleus is taken to be 𝑅 , then the radius of 𝑇𝑒 nucleus is nearly: [1]

(i) 𝑅 (ii) 𝑅 (iii) 𝑅 (iv) 𝑅


16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A):An electric bulb starts glowing instantly as it is switched on.
Reason(R) :Drift speed of electrons in a metallic wire is very large.
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Photoelectric effect demonstrates the wave nature of light.
Reason (R) : The number of photoelectron is proportional to the frequency of light.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A):The displacement current satisfies the property of continuity.
Reason (R): The sum of displacement and conduction currents remains constant along a closed path.

SECTION B
19. Derive the expression for the torque acting on a magnetic dipole placed in a uniform magnetic field. [2]
OR
What is Curies law of magnetism? Why diamagnetic materials do not affected by temperature? [2]
20. A coil of inductance 0.50 H and resistance 100 Ω is connected to a 240 V, 50 Hz ac supply. Find the
maximum current in the coil ? [2]
21. A ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism such that the angle of incidence is equal to angle
𝟑
emergence and each of these angles is equal to of angle of prism. What is the value of angle of deviation? [2]
𝟒
22. The energy levels of an atom are given below in the diagram. Which of the transitions belongs to
Lyman and Balmer series ? Calculate the ratio of shortest wavelengths of the Lyman and the
Balmer series of the spectra. [2]

23. Explain how the width of the depletion layer in a p-n junction diode changes when the junction is
(i) forward biased (ii) reverse biased. [2]
Page-63
24. Suppose that the electric field of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is
𝐸 = 3.1 𝑐𝑜𝑠 1.8 𝑦 + 5.4 × 10 𝑡 𝚤̂ [2]
(a) What is the wavenumber of the electromagnetic wave?
(b) Write an expression for the magnetic field part of the wave.
25. No interference pattern is observed in the following cases.
(a)Two coherent sources are infinitely close to each other
(b)Two coherent sources are far apart from each other.
Justify your answer. [2]
OR
In Young’s double slit experiment plot a graph showing the variation of fringe width versus the distance of
the screen from the plane of the slits keeping other parameter same. What information can one obtain from
the slope of the curve? [2]
SECTION C

26. Two capacitors of capacitance 10 𝜇𝐹 and 20𝜇𝐹 are connected in series with a 6V battery. After the
capacitors are fully charged, a slab of dielectric constant(K) is inserted between the plates of the two
capacitors. How will the following be affected after the slab is introduced?
(a) the charges on the two capacitors
(b) the electric filed energy stored in the capacitors
(c) the potential difference between the plates of the capacitors
Justify your answer.` [3]
27. Derive the expression for resistivity of a conductor in terms of its material parameters. [3]
OR
Using Kirchhoff's laws obtain the relation between the resistances of a balanced Wheatstone bridge.[3]
28. (i)A monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm is incident normally on a single slit of width 0.2 mm
to produce a diffraction pattern. Find the angular width of the central maximum obtained on the
screen.
(ii)Estimate the number of fringes obtained in Young's double slit experiment with slit separation
0.5mm, which can be accommodated within the region of total angular spread of the central
maximum due to single slit. [3]
29. Define the terms (i) cut-off voltage (ii) threshold frequency in relation to the phenomenon of
photoelectric effect.
Using Einstein’s photoelectric equation show how the cut-off voltage and threshold frequency for a
given photosensitive material can be determined with the help of a suitable graph. [3]
OR
(a) Define the term intensity of radiation in photon picture.
(b)Plot a graph showing the variation of photo current vs collector potential for three different intensities
𝑰𝟏 > 𝑰𝟐 > 𝑰𝟑 , two of which (I1 and I2) have the same frequency 1 = 2 = ν and the third has frequency 1>v.
(c) Explain the nature of the curves on the basis of Einstein's equation. [3]
30. Obtain the binding energy of a nitrogen nucleus ( 𝑁) from the following data in MeV.
Given 𝑚 = 1.00783 𝑢 , 𝑚 = 1.00867 𝑢 , 𝑚 = 14.00307 𝑢 [3]

SECTION D

31. (a) State Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics. Using this theorem, derive an expression for the electric
field intensity due to an infinitely long, straight wire of linear charge density λ C/m.
(b) Two parallel uniformly charged infinite plane sheets, ‘1’ and ‘2’, have
charge densities +𝜎 and −2𝜎 respectively. Give the magnitude and direction of the net electric field
at a point (i) in between the two sheets and (ii) outside and near the sheet ‘1’. [5]
Page-64
OR

(a)Deduce an expression for the electric field at a point on the equatorial plane
of an electric dipole of length 2a.
(b)Two small identical electrical dipoles AB and CD, each of dipole moment ‘p’
are kept at an angle of 120 as shown in the figure. What is the resultant dipole
moment of this combination? If this system is subjected to electric field ( 𝐸⃗ )
directed along +𝑋 direction, what will be the magnitude and direction of the
torque acting on this? [5]
32. (a) Use Biot-Savart law to derive the expression for the magnetic field due to a circular coil of radius
R having N turns at a point on the axis at a distance 'x' from its centre.
(b) Two identical coils P and Q each of radius ‘R’ are lying in perpendicular planes such that they have a
common centre. Find the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field at the common centre of the
two coils, if they carry currents equals to 𝐼 and √3 𝐼 respectively. [5]
OR
(a)With the help of a diagram, explain the principle and working of a moving coil galvanometer.
(b) A voltmeter of a certain range is constructed by connecting a resistance of 𝟗𝟖𝟎 𝛀 in series with a
galvanometer. When the resistance of 𝟒𝟕𝟎 𝛀 is connected in series after removing 980 Ω , the range get halved
Find the resistance of the galvanometer. [5]
33. (a) Draw the energy band diagrams for the conductor and intrinsic semiconductor. Write any two
distinguishing features between them on the basis of energy band diagrams.
(b)The number of silicon atoms per m3 is 5×1028. This is doped simultaneously with 5×1022 atoms
per m3 of arsenic and 5×1020 per m3 atoms of indium. Calculate the number of electrons and
holes. Given that ni=1.5×1016 /m3. [5]
OR
(a)State and explain the processes involved in the formation
of p-n junction mentioning how the depletion layer is formed.
(b) If each diode in figure has a forward bias resistance of 25Ω
and infinite resistance in reverse bias, what will be the values
of current I1, I2, I3 and I4 ? [5]

SECTION E
34. Case study: Motional EMF
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
Consider a conductor PQ of length l moving towards right with velocity 𝑣⃗
perpendicular to à magnetic field 𝐵⃗ directed into the plane of paper. As the
conductor PQ moves, its free electrons also move in the same direction and
experience magnetic Lorentz force, Fm= evB. By Fleming’s left-hand rule,
electrons move from P to Q within the conductor. The end P becomes
positive and end Q becomes negative. An electric field is set up in the
conductor from P to Q. This field exerts a force, Fe=eE on the free electrons. The accumulation of
charges at the two ends continues till these two forces balance each other, i.e., Fm = Fe or evB = eE or
vB =E. Potential difference between the ends P and Q, V = El = vBl. It is the magnetic force on the free
electrons that maintains p.d. and produces the emf, E =Blv. As this emf is produced due to the motion
of a conductor, so it is called a motional emf.
(i) What is Lorentz’s force? Write its mathematical expression? [1]
(ii) In the above given figure, explain why end P is positive and end Q is negative? [1]
−1
(iii) An aeroplane having a wing space of 35m flies due north with the speed of 90 ms given
B=4×10−5T. Find the potential difference between the tips of the wings. [2]
Page-65
OR

(iii)If the vertical component of earth's magnetic field be 6 X 10-5Wb/m2, then what will be the induced
potential difference produced between the rails of a meter-gauge when a train is running on them with a
speed of 36 Km/h? [2]

35.Case Study: Total Internal Reflection

Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.

If light passes from an optically denser medium to a rarer medium, then at the interface, the light is partly
reflected back into the denser medium and partly refracted to the rarer medium. This reflection is called
internal reflection. As the angle of incidence i increases, the angle of refraction r also increases. At a certain
value of i, the angle of refraction becomes 90°. This angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the
angle of refraction in the rarer medium is 90° is called the critical angle of the denser medium (ic). If i is
increased beyond ic, no refraction is possible, and the incident ray is totally reflected. This phenomenon is
known as total internal reflection. Multiple internal reflections in diamond (ic =24.4°), totally reflecting
prisms and mirage, are some examples of total internal reflection. Optical fibres consist of glass fibres
coated with a thin layer of material of lower refractive index. Light incident at an angle at one end comes out
at the other, after multiple internal reflections, even if the fibre is bent.

(i) What are the conditions to be satisfied for Total internal Reflection to take place? [1]
(ii)Light travelling from a transparent medium to air undergoes just total internal reflection at an
angle of incidence of 450. Then what will be the refractive index of the medium? [1]
(iii)Explain how multiple internal reflections in diamond cause the dazzling of diamond. [2]
OR
(iii) A typical optical fibre consists of a fine core of a material of refractive index μ1, surrounded by a
glass or plastic cladding with refractive index μ2. Then which one out of μ1 and μ2 is greater and why? [2]

Page-66
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-6)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 i 1
2 ii 1
3 iii 1
4 ii 1
5 i 1
6 iv 1
7 iii 1
8 ii 1
9 i 1
10 iii 1
11 iv 1
12 ii 1
13 ii 1
14 iii 1
15 iv 1
16 c 1
17 d 1
18 a 1
Diagram ½
Derivation 1½
OR OR
19 Curie law 1
Diamagnetic materials don’t have permanent dipole moment. Generally due to
presence of even no.of electron , eqal and opposite change in magnetic dipole moment 1
cancel each other.
Maximum Voltage 𝑉 = 𝑉√2 ½
Maximum current , 𝐼 =
½
20 Inductive reactance 𝑋 = 𝜔𝐿 = 157Ω ½
Impedance 𝑍 = 𝑅 + 𝑋 = 186.14 Ω
So 𝐼 = = 1.82 𝐴 1/2

In Prism 𝑖 + 𝑒 = 𝐴 + 𝐷
½
And 𝑖 = 𝑒 =
21 3 ½
𝐴+𝐷 = 𝐴 ½
2
𝐴 60 ½
𝐷= = = 30
2 2
Transition C and E belong to Lyman series ½
Transition B and D belong to Balmer series ½
22 𝜆 ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1 1
= : = : = 3: 10
𝜆 Δ𝐸 Δ𝐸 0 − (−10) 0 − (−3) 1
(i) decreases with proper explanation ½+½
23 (ii) increases with proper explanation
½+½
Page-67
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 K 1.8 ½
(a)    0.287 m 1 ½
24  2 2 X 3.14
½
(b) 𝐵⃗ = 𝐵 cos(𝑘𝑦 + 𝜔𝑡) 𝑘 = 1.03 × 10 𝑇𝑐𝑜𝑠 1.8 𝑦 + 5.4 × 𝑡 𝑘 ½
𝝀𝑫
𝜷=
𝒅
(i)When the two coherent sources are placed infinitely close to each other, the fringe
width becomes very large. Even a single fringe may occupy the entire screen. The
interference pattern is not observable. 1
(ii)As the distance between the sources is increased, the fringe width goes on decreasing.
At very large separation, it becomes too small to be detected. The interference pattern 1
cannot be observed. OR
OR
25

1
Slope= λ/d
λ= d x slope

26
½

½
Diagram ½
Derivation of resistance R= ml/nAe2τ 1½
ρ= m/ne2τ 1
OR OR
27
Circuit diagram ½
Application of KCL and KVL ½ +½
Putting balance condition and calculating 1
Final expression ½
Page-68
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i) 2ϴ = 2λ/a = 5x 10-3 rad 1
(ii) β = λD/d
28
β/D = λ/d= angular fringe width in YDSE, ϴ/= 10-3rad 1
no. of interference fringes= 2ϴ/ ϴ/= 5 1
Definition of cut-off voltage ½
Definition of threshold frequency ½
Einstein’s equation K= hν – hν0 ½
V0 = hν/e - hν0/e ½
Graph 1
OR OR
(a) definition
(b) ½
29.

(c)The stopping potential is same for I1 and I2 as they have the same frequency. ½
The saturation currents are as shown in figure because I1>I2>I3. 1/2
𝑁 contain7 protons and 7 neutrons
7𝑚 = 7 × 1.00783 𝑢 = 7.05481 𝑢
7𝑚 = 7 × 1.00867 𝑢 = 7.06069 𝑢 1
30 Mass of nucleons in 𝑁 =14.11550 u
Mass of nucleus ,𝑚 = 14.00307 𝑢 1
Mass defect= 14.11550-14.00307=0.11243 u
Total binding energy=0.11243× 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉=104.67 MeV 1
(a) Diagram Derivation E=λ/2πε0r 1+2
(b)(i) E between the plate =3/20 directed towards –ve plate 1+1
(ii)E out side and near the ist plate=/20 directed towards +ve and –ve plate
OR OR
(a) diagram 1+2
Derivation of E= -KP/(r2+a2)3/2
(b) ½

31
½

½
Page-69
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a) Diagram 1
Derivation B=μ0NIR2/2(R2+ x2)3/2 1½
Graph ½
(b)

½
32

OR
OR
(a) Diagram
Principle 1
Working ½
(b) 1½
𝑉
𝐼 =
𝑅 +𝑅
𝑉 𝑉
=
𝑅 + 980 2 𝑅 + 470
𝑅 = 40Ω 1
1
½
(a) energy band diagram for conductor
½
intrinsic Semiconductor
2
Any two distinguishing features
(b) ne = nD – nA = 4.95 x 1022 per m3
½
nenh = ni2
½
nh = 4.54 x109 per m3
1
OR
(a)diffusion and drift explanation
33 OR
Formation of depletion layer
(b)I3 is zero as the diode in that branch is reverse biased. Resistance in the branch AB and EF are
1+1
each (125+25) Ω = 150Ω
1
As AB and EF are identical parallel branches, their effective resistance is 150 /2=75Ω
∴ Net resistance in the circuit = (75+25) Ω = 100Ω
½
∴ Current I1=5/100 = 0.05A
½
∴I2=I4=0.05/2=0.025A
1
Page-70
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i) Lorentz’s force definition ½
expression for Lorentz’s force ½
(ii) explanation 1
(iii) E =Blv
34
= 0.126 V 2
OR
E =Blv OR
= 6x 10-4 V 2

(i)two conditions
½+½
(ii) 𝜇 = = 1.414
1
(iii) explanation 2
35 OR
OR 1
μ2 is slightly less than μ1 1
explanation

Page-71
SAMPLE PAPER -7
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. The line AA’ is a charged infinite conducting plane which is perpendicular to
plane of paper. The plane has surface charge density 𝜎 and B is a ball of mass m
with like charge of magnitude q. B is connected by a string from a point on the
line AA’. The tangent of angle 𝜃 formed between line AA’ and string is

(i) (ii)
(iii) (iv) [1]
2. The electric potential at a point on the axis of a short electric dipole, at distance x from the midpoint of
dipole is proportional to:

(i) (ii) / (iii) (iv) [1]

3. From the graph between current 𝐼and voltage 𝑉 shown below, identify the portion corresponding to
negative resistance
(i) AB
(ii)BC
(iii)CD
(iv)DE [1]

4. Two wires of same length are shaped into a square and a circle if they carry same current, ratio of
magnetic moment is :
(i)2:π (ii)π:2 (iii) π:4 (iv)4 :π [1]
5. In a certain region electric field 𝐸 and magnetic field 𝐵 are perpendicularly to each other. An electron
⃗ ⃗
enters the region perpendicular to direction of both 𝐸⃗ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐵⃗ and moves undeflected. The speed of the
electron is:
| ⃗| | ⃗|
(i)𝐸⃗ . 𝐵⃗ (ii) |𝐸⃗ × 𝐵⃗| (iii) (iv) [1]
| ⃗| | ⃗|
6. Which of the following is weakly repelled by a magnet field:
(i)Iron (ii)Cobalt (iii)Steel (iv)Copper [1]
Page-72
7. Which of the following graphs represent the variation of current (I) with frequency (f) in an AC circuit
containing a pure capacitor

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) [1]


8. In a travelling plane electromagnetic wave, which of the following have zero average value?
(i)Magnetic energy and electric energy
(ii)Magnetic field and electric field
(iii)Magnetic energy and magnetic field
(iv)Electric energy and electric field [1]
9. The magnetic flux through a circuit of resistance R changes by an amount △𝝓 in time △t , Then the
total quantity of electric charge Q , which passing during this time through any point of the circuit is
given by
△ △ △ △
(i) Q = (ii) Q = ×R (iii) Q = +R (iv) Q = [1]
△ △ △
10. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the path difference at a certain point on the screen between two
interfering waves is 1/4th of the wavelength. The ratio of intensity at this point to that at the center of a
bright fringe is close to
(i)0.80 (ii)0.7 (iii)0.4 (iv)0.5 [1]
11. When two nuclei (A < 10) fuse together to from a heavier nucleus, the
(i)binding energy per nucleon increases. (ii)binding energy per nucleon decreases.
(iii)binding energy per nucleon does not change. (iv)total binding energy decreases. [1]
12. A photon beam of energy 12.1eV is incident on a hydrogen atom. The orbit to which electron at ground
state of H-atom be excited is
(i) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (iv) 5 [1]
13. The wavelength associated with an electron accelerated through a potential difference of 100V is of the
order of

(i) 1000A0 (ii) 100 A0 (iii) 10.5 A0 (iv) 1.2 A0 [1]


14. A capacitor is made of a flat plate of area A and second plate having a stair like structure as shown in
figure below. If width of each stair is A/3 and height is d. Find the capacitance of the arrangement.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv) [1]
15. A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external resistor R. The graph showing
the variation of P.D. across the cell versus I is:

(i) a (ii) b (iii)c (iv) d [1]

Page-73
16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion :When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from some distance, a bright spot is
seen at the center of shadow of the obstacle.
Reason :Destructive interference occurs at the center of the shadow.
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion :When Indium is added with pure germanium concentration of holes increases than free electrons.
Reason :Electrons move to conduction band gaining thermal energy.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion :de Broglie waves associated with a moving football is not visible.
Reason :Mass of football is large comparable to subatomic particles .
SECTION - B
19. Prove that Intensity of electromagnetic wave is uc, where u = energy density and c = speed of light in
vacuum . [2]
20. Figure shows the variation of intensity of magnetization versus
the applied magnetic field intensity ‘H’ for two magnetic
material A and B.
(i)Identify the material A and B
(ii) Draw the variation of susceptibility with temperature for A. [2]

21. What is the ratio of radii of the orbits corresponding to first excited state and ground state in a hydrogen
atom? [2]
OR
A heavy nucleus X of mass number 240 and binding energy per nucleon 7.6 MeV is spilt into two
fragments Y and Z of mass numbers 110 and 130. The binding energy per nucleons in Y and Z is 8.5
MeV . Calculate the energy Q released per fission in MeV. [2]
22.Draw a graph showing the variation of intensity versus the position on the screen in the Young’s
experiment when
(a) both the slits are opened and (b) one of the slits is closed . [2]
OR
If the two slits in Young’s experiment have width ratio 1 : 4, deduce the ratio of intensity at maxima &
minima in the interference pattern. [2]
23.Draw energy band diagram of p & n type semiconductors. Also write two differences between p and n
type semiconductors. [2]
24A biconvex lens has a focal length 2/3 times the radius of curvature of either surface. Calculate the
refractive index of lens material. [2]
25.Two large parallel plane sheets have uniform charge densities + σ and – σ. Determine the magnitude of
electric field (i) between the sheets, and (ii) outside the sheets. [2]
Page-74
SECTION – C

26.(a) State Bohr’s postulate to define stable orbits in hydrogen atom.


(b) A hydrogen atom initially in the ground state absorbs a photon which excites it to the n = 4 level.
Estimate the frequency of the photon. [3]

27.Figure shows a metal rod PQ of length l, resting on the smooth horizontal rails AB positioned between the
poles of a permanent magnet. The rails, rod and the magnetic field B are in three mutually perpendicular
directions. A galvanometer G connects the rails through a key ‘k’. Assume the magnetic field to be
uniform. Given the resistance of the closed loop containing the rod is R.
(i) Suppose K is open and the rod is moved with a speed v
in the direction shown. Find the polarity and the
magnitude of induced emf.
(ii) With K open and the rod moving uniformly, there is no
net force on the electrons in the rod PQ even though they
do experience magnetic force due to the motion of the rod.
Explain.
(iii) What is the induced emf in the moving rod if the magnetic field is parallel to the rails instead of
being perpendicular? [3]

28.Explain giving reasons for the following :


(a) Photoelectric current in a photocell increases with the increase in the intensity of the incident radiation.
(b)The stopping potential (V0) varies linearly with the frequency (𝞶) of the incident radiation for a given
photosensitive surface with the slope remaining the same for different surfaces.
(c) Maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is independent of the intensity of incident radiation. [3]
OR
Using photon picture of light, show how Einstein’s photoelectric equation can be established. Write two
features of photoelectric effect which cannot be explained by wave theory. [3]

29.(a) Figure shows the variation of resistance and reactance versus angular
frequency. Identify the curve which corresponds to inductive reactance
and resistance.
(a) Show that series LCR circuit at resonance behaves as a purely resistive
circuit.
(b) Compare the phase relation between current and voltage in series LCR
circuit for (i) 𝑋 > 𝑋 (ii) 𝑋 = 𝑋 [3]
OR
An a.c. voltage V = Vm sin 𝝎t is applied across an inductor of inductance L. Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule to
obtain expressions for
(i) the current flowing in the circuit (ii) the inductive reactance [3]

30. The potential difference across a resistor ‘r’ carrying current I is Ir.
(i) Now if the potential difference across ‘r’ is measured using a voltmeter of resistance′𝑅 ′, show that
the reading of voltmeter is less than the true value.
(ii) Find the percentage error in measuring the potential difference by a voltmeter. (iii) At what value of
𝑅 , does the voltmeter measures the true potential difference? [3]

Page-75
SECTION – E
All questions are compulsory. In case of internal choices, attempt any one.
31.(a) Derive an expression for the electric field E due to a dipole of length ‘2a’ at a point distant r from
the centre of the dipole on the axial line.
(b) Draw a graph of E versus r for r >> a.
(c) If this dipole were kept in a uniform external electric field E0, diagrammatically represent the position
of the dipole in stable and unstable equilibrium and write the expressions for the torque acting on the
dipole in both the cases. [5]
OR
(a) Use Gauss law to derive the expression for the electric field (E) due to a straight uniformly charged
infinite line of charge density λ C/m.
(b) Draw a graph to show the variation of E with perpendicular distance r from the line of charge.
(c) Find the work done in bringing a charge q perpendicularly from distance r to r (r >r ) of the
linear charge distribution. [5]
32.(a) Explain the term drift velocity of electrons in a conductor .Hence obtain the expression for the current
through a conductor in terms of drift velocity.
(b) Two cells of emfs E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1 and r2
respectively are connected in parallel as shown in the figure.
Deduce the expression for the
(i) equivalent emf of the combination.
(ii) equivalent internal resistance of the combination. [5]
OR
(a) State the two Kirchhoff’s rules used in the analysis of electric circuits and explain them.
(b) Derive the equation of the balanced state in a Wheatstone bridge using Kirchhoff’s laws. [5]
33.(a) Derive lens maker’s formula for a biconvex lens.
(b)A point object is placed at a distance of 12 cm on the principal axis of a convex lens of focal length
10 cm. A convex mirror is placed coaxially on the other side of the lens at a distance of 10 cm. If the
final image coincides with the object, sketch the ray diagram and find the focal length of the convex
mirror. [5]
OR
(a) What is a wave front? How does it propagate? Using Huygens’principle, explain reflection of a
plane wave front from a surface and verify the laws of reflection.
(b) A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction
pattern is obtained on a screen 1 m away. If the first minimum is formed at a distance of 2.5 mm
from the center of the screen, find the
(i) Width of the slit, and
(ii) Distance of first secondary maximum from the center of the screen. [5]
SECTION-E
34.Case Study : Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
A lens is a transmissive optical device that focuses or disperses light beams using refraction. A simple
lens consists of a single piece of transparent material, while compound lenses consist of several simple
lenses arranged along with a common axis. A lens can focus light to form an image, unlike a prism,
which refracts light without focusing.
(i)What type of lens is an air bubble inside water? [1]
(ii) A lens when immersed in a transparent liquid becomes invisible. Under what condition
does it happen? [1]
(iii)How far should an object be from the concave mirror of focal length 20cm to form a real image
one-fifth its size? [2]
OR
Two concave lens each of focal length 30cm are placed in contact. What is focal length of the
compound lens? [2]
Page-76
35. Case Study :
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
Semiconductor diode consists of two, differently doped semiconductor crystals – “p” and “n” types.
Together, they form so-called “p-n junction”, where the “n” layer (with electron donor dopants) has an
excess amount of electrons, which are the majority carriers there (we have more electrons (-) than
electron holes (+)). However, in the “p” layer (electron acceptor dopants) the majority carriers are
electron holes (+) rather than electrons (-), so we have more holes “to fill”, than electrons available.
The electron hole is a vacancy created by the electron “travelling” from its initial place to some other
location in that crystal. In reality, there is no such thing as “a hole”, but that lack of electron kind of
makes it a positively charged particle, which attracts negative electrons to form a pair again (holes can
move too).
(i)Between electron and holes which has more mobility ? [1]
(ii)In forward biasing of diode width of depletion layer
increases or decreases? [1]
(iii)Assuming the diodes to be ideal, find the value of current
in the circuit when a 2V battery is connected.
(a) positive terminal at A. (b) positive terminal at B. [2]
OR

Two semiconductor materials X and Y shown in the given figure are made by doping germanium
crystal with indium and arsenic respectively. The two are joined end to end and connected to a
battery as shown. (i) will the junction be forward biased or reverse biased, (ii) sketch V~𝐼graph
for this. [2]

Page-77
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-7)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 i 1
2 iv 1
3 iii 1
4 iii 1
5 iii 1
6 iv 1
7 iii 1
8 ii 1
9 iv 1
10 iv 1
11 i 1
12 ii 1
13 iv 1
14 ii 1
15 iii 1
16 c 1
17 c 1
18 a 1
It is defined as energy crossing per unit area per unit time.𝐼 =
= 1
= = 𝑢c
1/2
19

1/2

A- Para ½
20 B- Ferro ½
Inversely proportional graph 1
R𝛼 n2 1
4:1 1
21 OR OR
Q=110×8.5 +130×8.5- 240×7.6 1.5
=216MeV 0.5
(a)Interference intensity distribution graph
1
(b)Single slit diffraction intensity distribution graph
1
OR
OR
22 = =
1
=> ==
= 2=9:1 1
Page-78
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

½
23

= ( 𝜇 − 1) − 1
24 => = ( 𝜇 − 1) +
1
=> 𝜇 = 7/4=1.75
Between the plates= + = 1
25
Outside the plates= − =0 1
Bohr’s postulate of stable orbit

26

(i)induced emf=Blv 1
Polarity- p is positive and Q is negative
27
(ii) magnetic force is canceled by electric force due to excess charge at both ends 1
(iii) zero 1
(a)Variation of photocurrent with intensity of radiation. Increase in intensity imply
increase in no of photons and hence increase in no. of photo electrons .so photo current 1
increases.
(b) In stopping potential versus frequency for different materials graph slope = h/e = 1
constant
28
(c) Increase in intensity does not increase the energy of each photon. So maximum 1
kinetic energy of photo electrons remains same.
OR OR
Derivation of Einstein photoelectric equation 2
Any two failure of wave theory. 1
Page-79
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a) B- inductive resistance ½
C- Resistance ½
(b) At resosance XL=XC , So Z=R ,So pure resistive circuit 1
When 𝑋 > 𝑋 then voltage leads the current ½
29
When 𝑋 = 𝑋 , voltage and current are in same phage ½
OR OR
Derivation of expression of current 2
Inductance 1
1

30

1
Derivation 2
Graph
1

1/2

½
½
31
OR OR
Derivation
Graph 2
1

Page-80
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Drift velocity: It is the average velocity acquired by the free electrons superimposed over
the random motion in the direction opposite to electric field and along the length of the 1
metallic conductor.
E r  E 2 r1 2.5
Derivation E= 1 2 1.5
r1  r2
rr OR
32 Derivation r = 1 2
r1  r2
OR
Junction rule: At any junction, the sum of the currents entering the junction is equal to the 1
sum of currents leaving the junction
Loop rule: The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any closed loop involving 1
resistors and cells in the loop is zero 3
Derivation
Derivation of lens maker’s formula
2.5

33 OR
(a)Wave front is a surface of constant phase.
OR
Alternatively, It is the locus of all those points which are in the same phase of disturbance.
The wave propagates in a direction perpendicular to the wave front through
1
secondary wavelets originating from different points on it.
Prove of laws of reflection
(b)(i)
2

Page-81
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(i)divergent 1
(ii)refractive index of lens =refractive index of material 1
34 (iii)u=-120cm 2
OR OR
u=-15cm 2
(i)electron 1
(ii)decreases 1
(iii) a)0.2 A (b)0.2A 2
35
OR OR
forward biasing 1
graph 1
Page-82
SAMPLE PAPER -8
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. An electric dipole is
(i) a pair of electric charges of equal magnitude q but positive sign, separated by a small distance .
(ii) a pair of electric charges of equal magnitude q but opposite sign, separated by a small distance.
(iii) a pair of electric charges of equal magnitude q but negative sign, separated by a small distance d.
(iv) a pair of electric charges of unequal magnitude q separated by a small distance d. [1]

2. Equipotential surfaces
(i) are closer in regions of large electric fields compared to regions of lower electric fields.
(ii) will be more crowded near sharp edges of a conductor.
(iii) will always be equally spaced.
(iv) both (i) and (ii) are correct. [1]

3. Which of the following statements is false for a conductor?


(i) The surface of the conductor is an equipotential surface.
(ii) The electric field just outside the surface of a conductor is perpendicular to the surface.
(iii)No charge inside the conductor.
(iv) None of these. [1]

4. Current flows through uniform, square frames as shown in the figure. In which case is the magnetic
field at the centre of the frame not zero?

(i) a (ii) b (iii) c (iv) d [1]

Page-83
5. Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry current I in opposite sense separated by a distance .
Then the correct statement is:
(i) Magnetic field is zero at the mid-point line joining between them .
(ii) Magnetic field is added at the mid-point line joining between them .
(iii)Magnetic field is √2 at the mid point line joining between them .
(iv) none of the above [1]
6. A cell having an emf  and internal resistance r is connected across a variable external resistance R.
As the resistance R is increased, the plot of potential difference V across R is given by

(i) a (ii) b (iii) c (iv) d [1]

7. A current carrying power line carries current from west to east. What will be direction of magnetic field 1
meter above it?
(i) N to S (ii) S to N (iii) E to W (iv) W to E [1]
8. The magnetic field is parallel to a surface, then the magnetic flux through the surface is :
(i) zero (ii) small but not zero (iii) infinite (iv) large but not infinite [1]
9. What happens if one of the slits, say S1 in Young’s double slit experiment is covered with a glass
plate which absorbs half the intensity of light from it?
(i) The fringe width decreases
(ii)The bright fringes become less-bright and the dark fringes have a finite light intensity
(ii) The bright fringes become brighter and the dark fringes become darker
(iv) No fringes will be observed [1]
10. What happens to the interference pattern if the two slits S1 and S2 in Young’s double slit experiment are
illuminated by two independent but identical sources?
(i) The intensity of the bright fringes doubled
(ii) The intensity of the bright fringes becomes four times
(iii) Two sets of interference fringes overlap
(iv) No interference pattern is observed [1]

11. The strength of photoelectric current depends upon:


(i) angle of incident radiation
(ii) frequency of incident radiation
(iii) intensity of incident radiation
(iv) distance between anode and cathode [1]

12. When a yellow light is incident on a metal surface, no electrons are emitted while green light can emit
electrons. If the red light is incident on the surface then:
(i) no electrons are emitted (ii) photons are emitted
(iii) electrons of higher energy are emitted (iv) electrons of lower energy are emitted [1]

13. If 13.6 eV energy is required to ionize the hydrogen atom, then energy required to remove an electron
from n = 2 is
(i) 10.2 eV (ii) 0 eV (iii) 3.4 eV (iv) 6.8 eV. [1]

14. Ratio of the radii of the nuclei with mass numbers 8 and 27 would be
(i) 27/8 (ii) 8/27 (iii) 2/3 (iv) 3/2 [1]

Page-84
15. With fall of temperature, the forbidden energy gap of a semiconductor [1]
(i) increases (ii) decreases
(iii) sometimes increases and sometimes decreases (iv) remains unchanged

16 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion: In series LCR resonance circuit, the impedance is equal to the ohmic resistance.
Reason: At resonance, the inductive reactance exceeds the capacitive reactance. [1]
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion: A capacitor is connected to a direct current source. Its reactance is infinite.
Reason: Reactance of a capacitor is given by χc = 1/ωC.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false

Assertion: Electromagnetic waves interact with matter and set up oscillations


Reason: Interaction is independent of the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave.
SECTION-B
19. (a) An electrostatic field line is a continuous curve. That is, a field line cannot have sudden
breaks. Why ? (b) Explain why two field lines never cross each other at any point? [2]
OR.
Two balls have same kind of charge, can they attracts each other? If yes how? Explain. [2]
20. Define neutral point. Draw lines of force when two identical magnets are placed at a finite distance
apart with their N-poles facing each other. Locate the neutral points. [2]
21. A screen is placed 90 cm from an object. The image of the object on the screen is formed by a
convex lens at two different locations separated by 20 cm. Determine the focal length of the lens. [2]
22. How will the interference pattern in Young’s double-slit experiment get affected, when
a) distance between the slits S1, and S2 reduced and
(b) the entire set-up is immersed in water? Justify your answer in each case. [2]
23. An electron and alpha particle have the same de-Broglie wavelength associated with them. How are
their kinetic energies related to each other? [2]

OR

The figure shows a plot of three curves a, b, c, showing the


variation of photocurrent vs. collector plate potential for three
different intensities I1, I2 and I3 having frequencies 1, v2 and
v3 respectively incident on a photosensitive surface.
Point out the two curves for which the incident radiations have
same frequency but different intensities. Justify. [2]

Page-85
24. Distinguish between an intrinsic semiconductor and p-type semiconductor. Give reason, why a
p-type semiconductor crystal is electrically neutral although nh >> ne? [2]

25. Draw a plot of the potential energy of a pair of nucleons as a function of their separations. Mark the
regions where the nuclear force is (i) attractive and (ii) repulsive. Write any two characteristic features
of nuclear forces. [2]
SECTION-C
26. (a) Why does magnetic field of a solenoid is strong inside ? Draw the pattern of the magnetic field
lines.
(b) How is the magnetic field inside a given’ solenoid made strong? [3]

27. (a) Obtain the expression for the magnetic energy stored in a solenoid in terms of the magnetic field
B, area A and length l of the solenoid.
(b) How is this magnetic energy per unit volume compared with the electrostatic energy per unit
volume stored in a parallel plate capacitor? [3]

28. Why are infrared radiations referred to as heat waves also? Name the radiations which are next to
these radiations in the electromagnetic spectrum having
(a) Shorter wavelength and
(b) Longer wavelength.
(c)Find the wavelength of electromagnetic waves of frequency 5x10 19 Hz in free space. Give its two
applications. [3]
OR
In a plane electromagnetic wave, the electric field oscillates sinusoid ally with a frequency of
2x1010 Hz and amplitude 48 V/m.
(a) What is the wavelength of the em. wave?
(b) Calculate the amplitude of the oscillating magnetic field.
(c) Calculate the average energy density of the electromagnetic field of the wave? [3]

29. Two lines, A and B, in the plot given below show the variation of de-
Broglie wavelength, λ versus 1/√V, Where V is the accelerating
potential difference, for two particles carrying the same charge. Which
one of two represents a particle of smaller mass? Justify [3]

30. Using Bohr’s postulates of the atomic model, derive the expression for radius of nth electron orbit.
Hence obtain the expression for Bohr’s radius. [3]
OR
In Rutherford scattering experiment, draw the trajectory traced by -particles in the coulomb field of
target nucleus and explain how this led to estimate the size of the nucleus. [3]

(SECTION-D)

31. (a)Write a relation between current and drift velocity of electrons in a conductor. Use this relation to
explain how the resistance of a conductor changes with
the rise in temperature.
(b)In the following arrangement of capacitors, the energy
stored in the 6 μF capacitor is E.
Find the value of the following.
(i) Energy stored in 12 F capacitor.
(ii)Energy stored in 3 F capacitor.
(iii) Total energy drawn from the battery. [5]
Page-86
OR
(a) Obtain the expression for the potential due to an electric dipole of dipole moment p at a point ‘x’ on
the axial line.
(b) Two identical capacitors of plate dimensions l × b and plate separation d have dielectric slabs filled
In between the space of the plates as shown in the figures.

Obtain the relation between the dielectric constants K, K1, and K2. [5]
32. (a)Use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the value of the current I1 flowing in the circuit shown
in the figure.

(b)A uniform wire of resistance 12 Ω is cut into three pieces so that the
ratio of the resistances R1 : R2 : R3 = 1 : 2 : 3 and the three pieces are
connected to form a triangle across which a cell of emf 8V and internal
resistance 1Ω is connected as shown. Calculate the current through each part of the circuit. [5]

OR
(a)State Kirchhoff’s rules. Explain briefly how these
rules are justified.
(b):A network of resistors is connected to a 16 V battery
with internal resistance of 1Ω, as shown in Fig:
(i) Compute the equivalent resistance of the network.
(ii) Obtain the current in 1Ω resistor.
(iii) Obtain the voltage drop VCD. [5]
33. (i)A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 140 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 5.0
cm. What is the magnifying power of the telescope for viewing distant objects when
the telescope is in normal adjustment (i.e., when the final image is at infinity)?
(ii)Draw a labeled diagram for a refracting type astronomical telescope.
How will its magnifying power be affected by increasing (a) the focal length and (b) the aperture of
eyepiece? Justify your answer. [5]
OR
(i)Draw a labeled ray diagram of a Newtonian type reflecting
telescope.
Write any one advantage over refracting type telescope.

(ii)A right-angle crown glass prism with a critical angle of 41° is


placed after the object PQ in two positions as shown in figures.
Trace the path of rays from P and Q
passing through the prisms in the two cases. [5]

Page- 87
SECTION-E
34. CASE STUDY: P-N JUNCTION DIODE

When p side of p-n junction is connected to positive


terminal of battery and n side of p-n junction is
connected to negative terminal of battery then the p-n
junction is said to be in forward bias mode or forward
biased. And when p side of p-n junction is connected to
negative terminal of battery and n side of p-n junction is
connected to positive terminal of battery then the p-n junction is said to be in reverse bias mode or
reverse biased. The diode used to rectify an AC voltage is called as rectifier. Zener diode is also a p-n
junction diode which works in reverse bias condition and used as voltage regulator. Also, p-n junction
diodes are used in solar cells which is used to convert light energy into electrical energy. Light emitting
diodes are also p-n junction diodes which are used to produce light. The digital circuit which gives the
logical relationship between input and output voltage are called as logic gates.

( i.)Explain what is Fermi level? [1]


(ii).Differentiate semiconductors, conductors and insulators on the basis of band gap. [1]
(iii) Distinguish diffusion and drift? [2]
OR
( iii) Define junction field and barrier potential [2]

35. CASE STUDY: REFRACTION [1+1+2]


As shown in the above picture the Sun appears to be flattened at sunset and
sunrise is due to the atmospheric refraction. The density of the medium
decreases with altitude, so the rays coming from top and bottom are refracted
at different angles. This causes the apparent flattening of the sun at the time
of sunrise and sunset. But rays from the side of the sun are generally refracted by the same amount. So the
sun still appears circular on sides. It sometimes appears that when light is travelling obliquely from one
medium to another medium, the direction of the propagation of light in the second medium somehow
changes. This certain phenomenon is known as what we call the refraction of light. In simple words, it
describes the change in the velocity or speed of light when it travels from one medium to another medium.
The refraction of light depends upon the velocity of the medium we use and the nature of another medium
from which the light comes. Based on the above concept, answer the following questions.
(i) When is the bending of light coming from sun is almost negligible with
respect to a point on the surface of earth
(ii)What is the correct relationship between refractive indices n, n1 and n2 if
the behavior of light is as shown in the figure?
(iii)A convex lens of local length 30 cm and a concave lens of 10 cm focal
length are placed so as to have the same axis. Find the equivalent focal
length of the combination.
OR
(III) Two identical prisms 1 and 2, each with angles of 30o, 60o and 90o are
placed in contact as shown in figure. A ray of light when passed through
the combination, suffers a minimum deviation of 300. Find the refractive
index of the material of the prisms .

Page-88
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-8)
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 ii 1
2 iv 1
3 iv 1
4 iii 1
5 i 1
6 ii 1
7 i 1
8 i 1
9 ii 1
10 iv 1
11 iii 1
12 i 1
13 iii 1
14 iii 1
15 iv 1
16 c 1
17 a 1
18 c 1
A charge experiences a continuous force in the electric field so electric field line will
be a continuous curve. The charge moves continuously, it does not jump. So, the 1
electric field line cannot have sudden breaks.
Two field lines cannot cross each other because electric field intensity could not be in
two directions at one point. Hence, two field lines cannot cross each other 1
OR
19 Two balls with same charge can indeed attract each other. If one of the ball has greater OR
charge than the other, this situation will take place. Here is the logic behind this- 1
The balls will have same kind of charges, not the same amount of charges, hence,
1
both the balls will start inducing opposite king of charges. this will make them
attracted to each other.

It is a point near a magnet where the magnetic field of the earth is completely 1
balanced by the magnetic field of the magnet. The figure is as shown below.

20
1

The cross indicates the neutral point


Page-89
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Distance between the image (screen) and the object, D= 90 cm 1
Distance between two locations of the convex lens, d = 20 cm
Focal length of the lens = f
Focal length is related to d and D as:
21
1

Therefore, the focal length of the convex lens is 21.39 cm.


We know that fringe width β of the dark or bright fringes is given by β = Dλ/d where 1
d is the distance between the slits.
(a) When the distance between the slits, i. e. d is reduced then β will increase. The
22
interference pattern will thus become broader.
(b) When the entire set up is immersed in water, the pattern will become narrow due 1
to the decrease in the wavelength of light. The new wavelength λ’ = λ/n, hence β’= β/n
1

23 1
OR
1

OR
Stopping potential will be same for the same frequency. So its curves ‘a’ and ‘b’ 1
which have same frequency but different intensities. (I2 > I3)

24 1+1

As p –type is made by doping trivalent which is a neutral and semiconductor is also


neutral so they are neutral.
Page-90
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1

25

For r > r0 (attraction), For r <ro (repulsion)


1.Strong attractive force (stronger than the repulsive electric force between the protons)
2.Are short-range forces.
1

26

(a) Solenoid consists of a long wire wound in the form of a helix where the neighboring
turns are closely spaced. The field due to all the circular coils is added. 1
(b) Magnetic field inside a given solenoid is made strong by putting a soft iron core inside it.
It is strengthened by increasing the amount of current through it. 1
The magnetic field energy stored in a solenoid is given by the expression 1
U = ( ½)Ll2.
But for a solenoid B = μ0nl
l = B / μ0 n
Substituting in the above expression we have
27 U = 1/2 × (μ0n2Al)(B/μ0n)2 as L = μ0 n2 A l
U = ½ B2Alμ0 1
We know that the energy stored per unit volume in a parallel plate capacitor is
UE = (½)ε0E2
It is clear that in both cases the energy stored per unit volume is proportional to the square of 1
the field intensity.
This is because they produce a heating effect. ½+1/2
(a) Visible light and
(b) Microwaves
(c)Using c=

1
28

These are Gamma Rays.


Applications
(1) These rays are used to get information regarding atomic structure.
(2) They have very high penetrating power so they are used for detection purpose 1

Page-91
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR OR
(a) V =
EO = 48 V/m
1

(b) EO = cBO
1

(c) Energy density


1

29

Basic postulates of Bohr’s atomic model: 1


Radii of Bohr’s stationary orbits. According to Bohr’s postulates, angular momentum
of electron for any permitted orbit is,

Also, according to Bohr’s postulates, the centripetal force is equal to electrostatic force
between the electron and nucleus.
1
30

Page-92
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR 1
The Rutherford scattering experiment is also known as the Geiger Marsden experiment.

For most of the α-particles, impact parameter is large, hence they suffer very small
repulsion due to nucleus and go right through the foil.
Trajectory of α-particles 1

It gives an estimate of the size of nucleus, that it relatively very small as compared to the 1
size of atom. Size of nucleus is less than the distance of closest approach.
(a)Relation between current and drift velocity : 1

On increasing temperature, the resistance of the conductor increases due to increase in


frequent collisions of electrons with each other, resulting into decrease in the drift velocity
(b) (i) Energy stored in 6 μ capacitor is E. Capacitors 6 μF and 12 μF are connected in
parallel.
So, the voltage across 6 μF capacitor 1
= voltage across 12 μF capacitor
= voltage across 12 μF capacitor
= V (say)
As E = 1/2 × (6 × V² )
31 ∴ V2 = E/3
Similarly energy U’ stored in 12 pF capacitor
= 1/2 × (12 × V² )
= 2E 1
U’ = 2 E
(ii) Equivalent capacitance of 6 µF and 12 µF is 6 + 12 = 18 µF
Charge on 18 µF and 3 µF is same as they are in series 1
∴ Q = CV= 18 × V
∴ Energy in 3 µF capacitor
U” = (½) Q2 C = ½ (18V)23
U” = 1/2×[18×18 (E/3) ]/3
U” = 18E 1
(c) Total energy drawn from battery U = E + 2E + 18E = 21E
Page-93
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR 3
(a) Consider an electric dipole of length 2a and having charges + q and — q. Let us find the
potential on the axial Une at point P at a distance OP = x from the center of the dipole.

Now potential at point P is

(b) When there is no dielectics then


C = ε0lb/d
For the first capacitor
C’ = Kε0lb/d = KC 2
The second case is a case of two capacitors connected in parallel, therefore
C1 = K1ε0lb/2d
C2 = K2ε0lb/2d
These two are connected in parallel, therefore we have
C” = C1 + C2 = K1ε0lb/2d + K2ε0lb/2d
= C(K1+K2)
If the capacitance in each case be same, then C’ = C”
Hence K= (K1+K2)
(a)Using Kirchoff’s first law at junction E, we get
I3 = I1 + I2
In loop ABCDA, using Kirchoff’s second law, we get

80 – 20 I2 + 30 I1 = 0
32
3

So (-) sign of current indicates that the direction of current is opposite to that as
shown in the circuit diagram.

Page-94
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(b) 2

OR
(i)Kirchhoff’s rules.
Kirchhoff’s junction rule : At any junction, the sum of the currents entering the junction is
equal to the sum of currents leaving the junction. OR
Kirchhoff’s loop rule : The algebraic sum of changes in potential in any closed loop
involving resistors and cells is zero. 2
These two laws are justified on the basis of law of conservation of charge and the law of 1
conservation of energy respectively 1
(ii) (a) 2+4+1+1=8ohm 1
(b)16/8=2A
(c) 2x4=8V
Focal length of the objective lens fo= 140 cm 1
Focal length of the eyepiece fe = 5 cm

(i)When the telescope is in normal adjustment, its magnifying power is given as:
fo 140
m   28
fe 5
(ii)The labelled diagram of the telescope is as shown in the figure.

33
2

(a) The magnifying power of a telescope is given by M = f0/fe. If the focal length of the 1
eyepiece is increased, it will decrease the magnifying power of the telescope. 1
(b) Magnifying power does not depend upon the aperture of the eyepiece. Therefore there is
no change in the magnifying power if the aperture of the eyepiece is increased.

Page-95
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR 2
(i)The labelled diagram is shown below.

Due to the large aperture of the mirror as compared to a lens the image formed is much
brighter than that formed by a refracting type telescope. 1
(ii) The path of rays is as shown.

1+1

(i) The maximum energy that an electron in a metal has at the absolute zero temperature is 1
called the Fermi level of energy.
(ii) The distinction between conductors, insulators and semiconductors is largely concerned
1
with the relative width of the forbidden energy gaps in their energy band structures. There is
a wide forbidden gap (more than 3eV) for insulators, narrow forbidden gap (less than3eV) in
34 case of semiconductors and no forbidden gap in case of conductors.
1+1
(ii) Differencr diffusion and drift?
OR
OR
1+1
( iii) Defination junction field and barrier potential
(i) During Noon Time 1
(ii) n1 = n2 > n 1
(iii) f= (-) (20/3)cm
35 2
OR
(iii) n=1.414 OR
2
Page-96
SAMPLE PAPER -9
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. Which of the following is not a property of electric field lines?
(i) Field lines are continuous curves without any breaks in charge free region.
(ii) Two field lines cannot cross each other
(iii) Field lines start at positive charges and end at negative charges
(iv) They form closed loops [1]
2. Figure shows some equipotential lines distributed in space. A charged object is moved
from point A to point B

(i) The work done in Fig. (i) is the greatest.


(ii) The work done in Fig. (ii) is least.
(iii) The work done is the same in Fig. (i), Fig. (ii) and Fig. (iii).
(iv) The work done in Fig. (iii) is greater than Fig. (ii) but equal to that in figure (i) [1]
3. Temperature dependence of resistivity 𝜌(T) of semiconductors, insulators and metals is significantly
based on the following factors.
(i) Number of charge carriers can change with temperature T.
(ii) Time interval between two successive collisions doesn’t depend on T.
(iii) Length of material can be a function of T.
(iv) Mass of carriers is a function of T. [1]

4. A circular loop and square loop has same length. Both carry same current in the same sense. The ratio of
the magnetic moment [1]
(i) 1:1 (ii) 4:π (iii) π: 1 2
(iv) π : 4
Page-97
5. Two α-particles have the ratio of their velocities as 3 : 2 on entering the magnetic field. If they move in
different circular paths, then the ratio of the radii of their paths is
(i) 2 : 3 (ii) 3 : 2 (iii) 9 : 4 (iv) 4 : 9 [1]
6. The magnetic field strength due to a short bar magnet directed along its axial line at a distance r is B.
What is its value at the same distance along the equatorial line?
(i) 2B (ii) 2/B (iii) B/2 (iv) B/4 [1]
7. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v
perpendicular to one of its sides. A magnetic induction B constant in time and space, pointing
perpendicular and into the plane of the loop exists everywhere as in given figure.

The current induced in the loop is


(i) Blv/R clockwise (ii) Blv/R anticlockwise (iii) 2 Blv/R anticlockwise (iv) zero [1]
8. Electromagnetic waves travelling in a medium having relative permeability µr =1.3 and relative
permittivity ε r =2.14. The speed of electromagnetic waves in medium must be
(i) 1.8 × 108 m/s (ii) 1.8 × 104 m/s (iii) 1.8 × 106 m/s (iv) 1.8 × 102 m/s [1]
9. Choose the correct statement.
(i) A capacitor can conduct a dc circuit but not an inductor.
(ii) In a dc circuit the inductor can conduct but not a capacitor.
(iii) In dc circuit both the inductor and capacitor cannot conduct.
(iv) The inductor has infinite resistance in a dc circuit. [1]
10. Two waves having the intensities in the ratio of 9 : 1 produce interference. The ratio of maximum to
minimum intensity is
(i) 10 : 8 (ii) 9 : 1 (iii) 4 : 1 (iv) 2 : 1 [1]
11. Electrons used in an electron microscope are accelerated by a voltage of 25 kV. If the voltage is
increased to 100 kV then the de-Broglie wavelength associated with the electrons would
(i) increase by 2 times (ii) decrease by 2 times (iii) decrease by 4 times (iv) increase by 4 times [1]
12. If an electron in a hydrogen atom jumps from the 3rd orbit to the 2nd orbit, it emits a photon of
wavelength 𝜆. When it jumps from the 3rd orbit to the 1st orbit, the corresponding wavelength of
the photon will be
(i) λ (ii) λ (iii) λ (iv) λ [1]

13. Two nuclei have mass number in the ratio 64:125. The ratio of their densities are
(i) 4:5 (ii) 64:125 (iii) 1:1 (iv) 125:64 [1]
14. The power factor of the circuit as shown in the diagram is

(i) 1 (ii) (iii) (𝑖𝑣 ) [1]


√ √ √
15. In the above figure u represents the energy and C is capacitance of the
capacitor. Which of the
following quantity is constant for the above plot

(i) Potential (ii)Charge (iii)Capacitance (iv)Energy density [1]

Page-98
16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1[
a) Both A and Rare true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion:
In general dopants are chosen from group 13 and group 15 of the periodic table to form extrinsic semi-
conductors.
Reason:
Atomic sizes of group 13 and 15 are nearly same with group 14.
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and Rare true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b)Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): For a given photo sensitive material the emitted photoelectrons have different kinetic energy for
different radiations.
Reason (R): Energy of photoelectrons depends on intensity of incidence radiations.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and Rare true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b)Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A) :
When tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from some distance, a bright spot is seen at
the centre of the shadow of the obstacle.
Reason (R) :
Destructive interference occurs at the centre of the shadow.

SECTION-B

19. Name the electromagnetic radiation having the wavelength range from 1 mm to 700 nm. Give its two
important applications. [2]
–5
20. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is – 2.6 × 10 . Identify the type of magnetic material and
state its two properties. [2]
21. A nucleus with mass number A = 240 and BE/A = 7.6 MeV breaks into two fragments each of A = 120
with BE/A = 8.5 MeV. Calculate the released energy. [2]
OR
When four hydrogen nuclei combine to form a helium nucleus, Estimate the amount of energy in MeV
released in this process of fusion. (Neglect the masses of electrons and neutrinos) Given: (i) mass of 𝐻
=1.007825 u (ii) mass of helium nucleus = 4.002603 u, 1 u = 931 MeV/c2 [2]

22. A ray PQ incident on the face AB of a prism ABC, as shown in the figure,
emerges from the face AC such that AQ = AR. Draw the ray diagram
showing the passage of the ray through the prism. If the angle of the prism
is 60° and refractive index of the material of the prism is√3, determine the
values of angle of incidence and angle of deviation. [2]

Page-99
23. If each diode in figure has a forward bias resistance of 25 Ω and infinite resistance in reverse bias,
what will be the values of current I1, I2, I3 and I4? [2]

OR

Name the biasing of the diodes in the above figures.


Hence draw the i-v characteristics of the biasing of the diode 2. [2]

24 (a) How many interference fringes will be seen within central fringe of diffraction if the size of each
slit is the 𝑡ℎ separation between the two slits?
(b) Sketch of a graph showing the variation of fringe width versus the distance of the screen from the
plane of the slits (keeping other parameters same) in Young’s double slit experiment. What
information can one obtain from the slope of this graph?. [2]
25. Two infinitely large plane thin parallel sheets having surface charge densities A = 2σ1 and B =2σ2
(σ1> σ2) are shown in the figure. Write the magnitudes and directions of net fields in the regions marked
II and III. [2]

SECTION- C
26. A straight thick long wire of uniform circular cross-section of radius ‘a’ is carrying a steady current I.
The current is uniformly distributed across the cross-section. Use Ampere’s circuital law to obtain a
relation showing the variation of the magnetic field (B) inside and outside the wire with distance r,
(r ≤ a) and (r > a) of the field point from the centre of its cross-section. What is the magnetic field at the
surface of this wire? Plot a graph showing the nature of this variation. [3]
OR
Two parallel wires of infinite long of negligible thickness carrying current of I each in opposite
direction . Find the force experienced per unit length by each wire in magnitude as well as direction .
Hence define one ampere. [3]
27. A rectangular conducting loop of length l and breadth b
enters a uniform magnetic field B as shown.
The loop is moving at constant speed v and at t = 0 it just
enters the field B. Sketch the following graphs for the time
interval t = 0 to 3l/v.

(i) Magnetic flux – time


(ii) Induced emf – time
(iii) Power – Time Resistance of the loop is R. [3]
Page-100
28 (a) Figure shows the variation of resistance and reactance versus angular frequency. Identify the curve
which corresponds to inductive reactance and resistance.
(b) Show that a series LCR circuit at resonance behaves as purely resistive circuit.
(c) Draw a phasor diagram for a series LCR circuit if XC>XL [3]

29. (a)Define the term ‘intensity of radiation’ in photon picture.


(b)Plot a graph showing the variation of photo current Vs collector potential for three different
intensities I1> I2> I3, two of which (I1 and I2) have the same frequency 1=2= ν and the third has
frequency ν3> ν.
(c) Explain the nature of the curves on the basis of Einstein’s equation. [3]

OR

When a photosensitive material is irradiated with the light of frequency n, the maximum speed of
electrons is given by vmax. A plot of v2 max is found to vary with frequency ν as shown in the figure. Use
Einstein’s photoelectric equation to find the expressions for (i) Planck’s constant and
(ii) work function of the given photosensitive material, in terms of the parameters l, n and mass m of the
electron.
(ii) how threshold frequency can be obtained from the plot ? [3]

30. (a) State de - Broglie hypothesis.

(b)Using Bohr’s seconds postulates and de- Broglie relation, show that circumference of Bohr’s orbit
is equals to integral multiple of de-Broglie wave length of electron in this orbit. [3]

Page-101
SECTION - D

31. (a) Derive the expression of electric potential due to a point charge.
(b) If n similar small drops of mercury, each of capacity C, surface charge density σ, energy E and
potential V, combine to form a big drop, then calculate the capacity, surface charge density, energy and
potential of the big drop. [5]
OR
(a) Explain why, for any charge configuration, the equipotential surface through a point is normal to the
electric field at that point.
(b)Draw a sketch of equipotential surfaces due to a single charge (– q), depicting the electric field lines
due to the charge.

(c)Obtain an expression for the work done to dissociate the system of three charges placed at the
vertices of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’ as shown below. [5]

32. (a) Define relaxation time of the free electrons drifting in a conductor. How is it related to the drift
velocity of free electrons? Use this relation to deduce the expression for the electrical resistivity of the
material.
(b)Plot a graph showing the variation of current density (j) versus the electric field (E) for two
conductors of different materials. What information from this plot regarding the properties of the
conducting material, can be obtained which can be used to select suitable materials for use in making (i)
standard resistance and (ii) connecting wires in electric circuits? [5]
OR

(a)Establish a relation between terminal potential difference, emf and internal resistance
of a cell when it is in discharging condition.
(b)Plot the graphs to show the variation of (i)V~R (ii) V ~ I (iii) E~R , when a cell is connected to a
variable resistor. Name the physical quantities obtained from the slope and y- intercept of (ii) V ~ I
graph. [5]
33. (a) Draw a labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope.
(b) Define angular magnification and derive an expression for its magnifying power.
(c)Why is objective of a microscope of short aperture and short focal length? Give reason. [5]
OR

(a) State Huygen’s principle. Using this principle draw a diagram to show how a plane wave front
incident at the interface of the two media gets refracted when it propagates from a rarer to a denser
medium. Hence verify Snell’s law of refraction.
(b)When monochromatic light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, explain the following, giving
reasons:
(i) Is the frequency of reflected and refracted light same as the frequency of incident light ?
(ii) Does the decrease in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried by light wave? [5]

Page-102
SECTION –E
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
34. When we look into a tank filled with water, the bottom of the tank will appear to be raised. The real
depth is the actual depth of the bottom of the tank and the apparent depth is the virtual depth that is
observed as a result of the refraction of light. The apparent depth depends upon the refractive index of
the medium. The refractive index is a measure of the bending of the ray as it passes from one medium
to another. It is given by the ratio of the real depth to apparent depth.

(i)A diver under water looks obliquely at a fisherman standing on the bank of a lake. Would the
fisherman look taller or shorter to the diver than what he actually is? Explain your answer. [1]
(ii) Does the apparent depth of a tank of water change if viewed obliquely? If so, does the apparent
depth increase or decrease? [1]
(iii)A coin is placed at the bottom of a beaker filled with water up to a height of 10 cm. The refractive
index of water w.r.t air is 4/3. Find the distance through which the coin seems to be raised? [2]
OR
(iii) A small pin fixed on a table top is viewed from above from a distance of 50cm. By what distance
would the pin appear to be raised if it is viewed from the same point through a 15cm thick glass slab
held parallel to the table? Refractive index of glass = 1.5. Does the answer depend on the location of the
slab? [2]
35. Read the following paragraph and answer the question
An uninterruptible power supply or uninterruptible power source (UPS) is an electrical apparatus
that provides emergency power to a load when the input power source or mains power fails. A
rectifier is an essential part of UPS which converts alternating current (ac) to direct current
(dc).The process is known as rectification. Rectifiers are often found serving as components of
dc power supplies and high-voltage direct current power transmission systems. Many applications of
rectifiers, such as power supplies for radio, television and computer equipment, require a steady
constant dc voltage. In these applications the output of the rectifier is smoothed by an electronic
filter.

(i) Which property of PN junction helps in rectification? [1]


(ii) The frequency of ac input to a half wave and full wave rectifier is 50Hz. What will be the output
frequency in both the cases? [1]
(iii)Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier by showing the input and output waveforms. [2]
OR
(iii)Draw the diagram of a full wave rectifier with capacitor filter. Using the diagram draw the input and
output wave form. [2]
Page-103
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-9)
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 iv 1
2 iii 1
3 i 1
4 ii 1
5 ii 1
6 iii 1
7 iv 1
8 i 1
9 ii 1
10 iii 1
11 ii 1
12 ii 1
13 iii 1
14 iii 1
15 ii 1
16 a 1
17 c 1
18 c 1
Infrared radiation 2
19 Any two uses

Dia magnetic
20
Any two properties 2

2
21 OR
OR
2

Page-104
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

22 2

2
23 OR
2

OR
Reverse biased
Forward Biased

(a)

24 2

(b)Slope = 𝜆/𝑑 = angular width

Page-105
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

25 2

26 3

Page-106
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
OR 1½
Derivation of force per unit length ½
Direction 1
Definition

27 3

Curve – B- Inductor
Curve C- resistor

28 3

Page-107
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

OR
29
OR

(a)de-Broglie Hypothesis
(b) 1

Page-108
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

31 (a)Derivation of electric potential 𝑉 = 𝑘 2


(b)

OR OR
(a)The work done in moving a charge from one point to another on an equipotential
surface is zero. If the field is not normal to an equipotential surface, it would have a non 1
zero component along the surface. This would imply that work would have to be done to
move a charge on the surface which is contradictory to the definition of equipotential
surface.

2+1

Page-109
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a)Definition 2
32 𝑒𝐸
𝑉 = 𝜏
𝑚
Deduction of 𝜌 =
(b)

The graph with a greater slope is a better conductor and the graph with a lesser slope is a OR
poor conductor than the other.
2.5
(i) To make a standard resistance: A resistor should allow only a limited current to flow
through it. Hence plot (2) should be used to make a resistor.
(ii) To make a connecting wire: A wire should have a higher conductivity. Hence, plot (1)
should be used to make a wire.
1.5
OR
(a) Establish of 𝑉 = 𝐸 − 𝐼𝑟

(b) 1

(c) Slope gives internal resistance, Y- intercept gives emf

Page-110
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS

1
Definition

Derivation of
2

1
Reason
OR
OR
33 1
(a) statement

1
Derivation of Snell’s law

(b) (i) Frequency remains the same. When the light of particular frequency is incident
it interacts with the atoms of the matter, which further causes forced oscillations. 1
As the frequency of charged oscillator and the frequency of wave emitted by
charged oscillator is same, therefore the frequency of reflected and refracted light
is same. 1
(ii) No, energy carried by a light wave does not depend on its speed. Instead it
depends on its amplitude.

Page-111
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a)taller, when light rays travel from rarer to denser it bends towards the 1
normal. 1
(b)yes, it will decrease 2
34 Or
(c) 2.5cm (normal shift)
Or 2
5cm, no.
1

(a) During forward biased diode conducts and during reverse biased it does not
conduct. 1
(b) 50 Hz,100 Hz

35

Or
OR

Page-112
SAMPLE PAPER -10
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All the sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQs of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of
two marks each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D
contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E contains two case study
based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B,
C, D and E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
1. The value of minimum force acting between two charges placed at 1 m apart from each other is: [1]
(i)Ke2 (ii)Ke (iii) Ke/4 (iv)Ke2/2
2. A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-particle have kinetic energy. Then their de Broglie wavelengths
compare as: [1]
(i) λp = λn > λe > λα (ii) λα < λn < λp < λe
(iii) λe < λp = λn > λα (iv) λe = λp = λn = λα
3. Fusion processes, like combining two deuterons to form a He nucleus are impossible at ordinary
temperatures and pressure. The reasons for this can be traced to the fact: [1]
(a) nuclear forces have long range.
(b) nuclei are positively charged.
(c) the original nuclei must be completely ionized before fusion can take place.
(d) the original nuclei must first break up before combining with each other.
4. The direction of external electric field in this diagram is: [1]
(i) Right to Left
(ii) Up to Down
(iii) Down to Up
(iv) Left to Right
5. Which of the following characteristics of electrons determines the current in a conductor? [1]
(i) Drift velocity alone.
(ii) Thermal velocity alone.
(iii) Both drift velocity and thermal velocity.
(iv) Neither drift nor thermal velocity.
6.In Fig. Vo is the potential barrier across a p-n
junction, when no battery is connected across the junction
(a) 1 and 3 both correspond to forward bias of junction
(b) 3 corresponds to forward bias of junction and 1 corresponds to
reverse bias of junction
(c) 1 corresponds to forward bias and 3 corresponds to reverse bias of
junction.
(d) 3 and 1 both correspond to reverse bias of junction. [1]
Page-113
7. Figure shows a small magnetised needle P placed at a point O. The arrow
shows the direction of its magnetic moment. The other arrows show different
positions (and orientations of the magnetic moment) of another identical
magnetised needle Q. The configuration corresponds to the lowest potential
energy among all the configurations shown is:
(i)PQ1
(ii) PQ4
(iii)PQ3
(iv)PQ6 [1]
8. A rectangular loop and a circular loop are moving out of a magnetic field region to a field free region with
a constant velocity 𝑣. In which loop do you expect the induced emf to be constant during the passage out of
the field region? The field is normal to the loops. [1]

(i) Circular loop (ii) Rectangular loop


(iii) Both the loop same (iv) No emf will be produced

9. There are two coils A and B separated by some distance. If a current of 2 A flows through A, a magnetic
flux of 10-2 Wb passes through B (no current through B). If no current passes through A and a current of 1 A
passes through B, then the flux through A is: [1]
(i) 5 ×10–3 Wb (ii) 15 ×10–3 Wb (iii) 5 ×10–4 Wb (iv) 15 ×10–4 Wb

10. If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A, the value of the current 1/300 seconds after its value
becomes zero is: [1]

3 5
(i) 5 2 A (ii) 5 A (iii) 5/6 A (iv) A
2 2
11. If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors of the electromagnetic wave respectively, the
direction of propagation of electromagnetic wave is along: [1]
(i) E (ii) B (iii) B × E (iv) E × B
12. Electromagnetic waves with wavelength [1]
(a) λ1 is used in satellite communication.
(b) λ2 is used to kill germs in water purifies.
(c) λ3 is used to detect leakage of oil in underground pipelines.
(d) λ4 is used to improve visibility in runways during fog and mist conditions.
The correct option is:
(i) λ1 Microwave, λ2 UV , λ3 X rays, λ4 Infrared
(ii) λ 3 < λ2 < λ 4 < λ 1
(iii) Both (i) & (ii) are correct
(iv) option (i) is correct but option (ii) is wrong.

13. A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a lens is placed in the path of the convergent beam 12cm
from P. The point at which the beam converge if the lens is a concave lens of focal length 16cm is: [1]
(i) 38cm (ii) 4cm (iii) 48cm (iv) 28cm
14. In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength λ , the intensity of light at a
point on the screen where path difference is λ, is K units. The intensity of light at a point where path
difference is λ /3 is: [1]
(i) K/4 (ii) 4K (iii)K (iv) K/2
Page-114
15. During refraction of plane wave front at plane surface obliquely from rarer medium to denser medium:
(i)Width of incident wave front is same as width of refracted wave front.
(ii)Width of incident wave front is more than width of refracted wave front.
(iii) Width of incident wave front is less than width of refracted wave front.
(iv)With of refracted is independent of refractive index of both medium. [1]

16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A) : An n-type semiconductor has a large number of electrons but still it is electrically neutral.
Reason (R) : An n-type semiconductor is obtained by doping an intrinsic semiconductor with a pentavalent
impurity
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A) :A photon has no rest mass, yet it carries definite momentum.
Reason(R):Momentum of photon is due to its energy and hence its equivalent mass.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. [1]
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): During charging condition of capacitor there is no magnetic field between the plates of
capacitor.
Reason (R) : Displacement current between the plates is unable to produce magnetic field.
SECTION-B
19.Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R, both have same surface charge density σ
.They are brought in contact and separated.Find the new surface charge density on the sphere of radius R.[2]
20. (a) Draw variation of photoelectric current with collector plate potential for different frequencies of
incident radiation.
(b) An electron microscope uses electrons accelerated by a voltage of 50 kV. Determine the de Broglie
wavelength associated with the electrons. [2]
OR
(a)The given graph shows the variation of photo-electric current (I) versus
applied voltage (V) for two different photosensitive materials and for two
different intensities of the incident radiation. Identify the pairs of curves
that correspond to different materials but same intensity of incident
radiation.
(b) What is the de Broglie wavelength of a neutron, in thermal equilibrium
with matter, having an average kinetic energy of (3/2) kB T at 300 K. [2]
21. Calculate the amount of energy in electron volt required to break the oxygen nucleus into 8 protons and
8 neutrons using the following data.
Mass of one neutron = 1.00866 u
Mass of one protons = 1.00727 u
Mass of one electron = 0.00055 u
Atomic mass of oxygen = 15.99493 u. [2]
Page-115
22. Two long wires carrying current I1 and I2 are
arranged as shown in Fig. The one carrying current I1
is along is the x-axis. The other carrying current I2
is along a line parallel to the y-axis given by x = 0 and z = d.
Find the force exerted at O2 because of the wire along the x-axis. [2]

23. From molecular view point, discuss the temperature dependence of susceptibility for diamagnetism and
paramagnetism. [2]
24. Derive expression for the magnetic energy stored in a solenoid. Express this result in terms of magnetic
field B, area A and length l of the solenoid. [2]

OR
Derive expression for mutual inductance of two coaxial solenoids of same length different radii. [2]
25. An α-particle moving with initial kinetic energy K towards a nucleus of atomic number z approaches a
distance ‘d’ at which it reverses its direction. Obtain the expression for the distance of closest approach ‘d’
in terms of the kinetic energy of α-particle K. [2]

SECTION-C
26. An early model for an atom considered it to have a positively charged point nucleus of charge Ze,
surrounded by a uniform density of negative charge up to a radius R. The atom as a whole is neutral. For this
model, derive value of the electric field at a distance r (r < R) from the nucleus. [3]
27. Figure shows two identical capacitors C1 and C2 each of 1.5 µF
capacitance, connected to a battery of 2 V. Initially switch ‘S’ is closed.
After sometime ‘S’ is left open and dielectric slabs of dielectric constant
K = 2 are inserted to fill completely the space between the plates of the
two capacitors.
How will the charge in the capacitors be affected after the slabs are
inserted? [3]

28. Determine the position of final image from the centre of the lens system (a convex lens of focal length
30 cm and a concave lens of focal length 20 cm placed 8.0 cm apart with their principal axes coincident)
when a beam of parallel rays from an object at infinity incident on the convex lens. [3]

OR

A ray PQ is incident normally on the face AB of a triangular prism (fig) of


refracting angle 600. The prism is made of a transparent material of refractive
2
index .
3
Trace the path of the ray as it passes through the prism. Calculate the angle of
deviation. [3]

29.(a)The energy level diagram of an element is given.


Which transition corresponds to the emission of a
spectral line of wavelength 102.7 nm
(b) Using postulates of Bohr’s atomic
model find the radius of second orbit
of hydrogen atom. [3]
Page-116
30. Use Biot-Savart’s law to derive the expression for the magnetic field due to a circular coil of radius R
having N turns at a point on the axis at a distance x from its centre. [3]
OR
Derive the expression for the torque on a rectangular current carrying loop suspended in a uniform magnetic
field. [3]
SECTION-D
31. (a) Draw circuit diagram to study V-I characteristics of a p-n
junction diode in forward biased.
(b) The V-I characteristic of a silicon diode is shown in the Fig.
Calculate the static resistance of the diode at VD = –10 V.
(c)Why is the current under reverse bias almost independent
of the applied potential up to a critical voltage? [5]

OR
(a)Explain, with the help of a circuit diagram, the working of a p-n junction diode as a half-wave rectifier.
(b) The number of silicon atoms per m3 is 5 × 1028. This is doped simultaneously with 5 × 1022 atoms per m3
of Arsenic and 5 × 1020 per m3 atoms of Indium. Calculate the number of electrons and holes. Given that ni =
1.5 × 1016 m–3. Is the material n-type or p-type? [5]

32. (a)A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source , V(t) = Vm sin t. Using the phasor diagram, derive
the expression for the impedance of the circuit.
(b) Obtain the resonant frequency and Q-factor of a series LCR circuit with L = 3.0 H, C = 27 F, and
R = 7.4 Ω. [5]
OR
(a)Draw a labelled diagram of a transformer. Obtain the expression for ratio of secondary to primary voltage
in terms of number of turns and currents in the two coils.
(b) A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300 V to a step down transformer with its primary
windings having 4000 turns. What should be the number of turns in the secondary in order to get output
power at 230 V? [5]

33. Draw a labeled ray diagram of a refracting telescope. Define its magnifying power and derive the
expression for it. Write two important limitations of a refracting telescope over a reflecting type telescope.
[5]
OR
(a)Write the basic assumptions used in the derivation of lens – maker’s formula and hence derive this
expression.
(b) A convex lens has 20 cm focal length in air. What is the focal length in water? (R.I of air-water = 4/3,
air-glass = 1.5.) [5]
SECTION-E
34. Wheatstone bridge:
Wheatstone bridge is an arrangement of four resistances R1, R2, R3 and R4
connected as shown in the figure. Their values are so adjusted that the
galvanometer G shows no deflection. The bridge is then said to be balanced
when this condition is achieved. In the set up shown here, the points B and D
are at the same potential and it can be shown that R1/R2 = R3/R4 .This is called
the balancing condition. If any three resistances are known, the fourth can be
found. The practical form of Wheatstone bridge is slide wire bridge or Meter
bridge. Using this, the unknown resistance can be determined as
Page-117
(100  L ) R3
R4 = , where L is the balancing length of the Meter bridge.
L
(a) Under what condition, Wheatstone bridge is most sensitive? [1]
(b) What are the advantages of the null-point method in a Wheatstone bridge? [1]
(c) The measurement of an unknown resistance R is to be carried out using Wheatstone bridge .Two students
perform an experiment in two ways. The first students takes R2 = 10Ω and R1 = 5Ω. The other student takes
R
R2 = 1000Ω and R1 = 500Ω. In the standard arm, both take R3 = 5Ω. Both find R  2 R3  10 within
R1
errors. Which student does the experiment more accurately? [2]

OR
(c) Calculate the current drawn from the
battery by the network of resistors shown in the figure. [2]

35. Even before Young early experimenters – including Newton – had noticed that light spreads out from
narrow holes and slits. It seems to turn around corners and enter regions where we would expect a shadow.
These effects, known as diffraction, can
only be properly understood using wave
ideas. After all you are hardly surprised
to hear sound waves from someone
talking around a corner! When the
double slit in Young’s experiment is
replaced by a single narrow slit
(illuminated by a monochromatic
source), a broad pattern with a central
bright region is seen. On both sides,
there are alternate dark and bright
regions, the intensity becoming weaker away from the Centre.

(a) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen at
the centre of the shadow of the obstacle. Explain why? [1]
(b) In what way is diffraction from each slit related to the interference pattern in a double-slit experiment?
[1]
(c) Draw the variation of intensity pattern with distance from the centre, for single slit diffraction. Find the
relation between linear width of central maximum and secondary maximum. [2]

` OR

(c ) The intensity of higher order secondary maximum decreases with increase in order. Explain. [2]

Page-118
MARKING SCHEME (SAMPLE PAPER-10)

QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
1 i 1
2 ii 1
3 ii 1
4 iv 1
5 i 1
6 ii 1
7 iv 1
8 ii 1
9 i 1
10 ii 1
11 iv 1
12 iii 1
13 iii 1
14 i 1
15 iii 1
16 b 1
17 c 1
18 d 1
Total charge q=q1+q2=20R2 ½
After joining potential will be same
Q1/R=Q2/2RQ2=2Q1 ½
19 Total charge remains same q=Q1+Q2=3Q1=20R2
Q1=20R2/3 ½
1=Q1/4R2=5/3 1/2
(a)

½+1/2
(b) de Broglie wavelength associated with the electrons
1.227 nm 1.227 nm
20    5.48 X 10 12 m
V 50000 ½+1/2
OR OR
(a)(1,3)&(2,4)
h h
  
2m(3 / 2 ) K B T 3mK B T 1
6.62 X 10 34
 0.145nm 1
3 X 1.67 X 10  271.38 X 10  23 X 300
M  Z ( m p  m e )  ( A  Z ) m n  M A  1
21 8(1.00727  0.00055 )  8(1.00866 )  15 .99493  0.13691u
B.E.= ΔM c2 = (0.13691)(931.5)= 127.83 Mev 1
At O2, the magnetic field due to I1 is along the - y-axis. ( Bˆ  dlˆXrˆ  iˆXkˆ   ˆj ) 1
22
The second wire is along the y-axis and hence the force is zero. Fˆ  lˆXBˆ  ˆjX  ˆj  0̂ 1
Page-119
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons developing magnetic moments 1
opposite to applied field and hence is not much affected by temperature.
23 Para magnetism is due to alignments of atomic magnetic moments in the direction of
the applied field. As temperature increases, this alignment is disturbed and hence 1
susceptibilities of both decrease as temperature increases.
1 2
Proof of formula U m  LI 1
2
B
Using formula of L = 0n2Al & I 1
0n OR
24 1 1
Solving for U m  B 2 Al
2 0 OR
Proof of M12=M21=0n1n2r2il 1

(KE +KEN+PE)when  particle is at far apart = (KE +KEN+PE)when particle is 1


closest to nucleus
25 1
1
ZeX 2e 1 2 Ze 2
K 00  00  r0 
4 0 r0 4 0 K
Total negative charge inside the Gaussian surface of radius r is
 Ze 4 Zer 3
q  X r 3   3
4 3 3
R R ½
3
26 Total charge inside the Gaussian surface =
R3 ½
Q = Ze  Ze
r3
Ze 1 r 2
Using Gauss law E= ( 2  3)
4 0 r R
½
Charge in C1 when key is closed = CXV=1.5 X 2=3 C
Charge in C1 when key is open = K X C X V = 2 X 1.5 X 2 = 6 C
27 Charge in C2 when key is closed = CXV=1.5 X 2=3 C
1
½
Charge in C1 when key is open = Charge in C2 when key is closed =3 C
1
1 1 1
For convex lens ,u =   , f = 30cm    v  30cm
v f u
uf 1
For concave lens ,u = 30 – 8 = 22cm, f = - 20cm v  220cm 1
u f
1
Position of final image from the centre of the lens system = -220 + 4 = - 216cm, ie
OR
28 216 cm left of convex lens. 1/2
OR
Calculation of critical angle for surface AB using formula = 600 1/2
Calculation of angle of incident at surface AC using geometry=60 0
Tracing emergent ray coinciding to surface AC 1
1
Calculation of angle of deviation at surface AC using geometry=300
Page-120
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
Diagram 1
 0 NIR 2
Derivation of formula B  2
2( R 2  x 2 ) 3 / 2
30 OR OR
(a) Diagram 1
Derivation of formula   BINA cos  BINA sin 
where θ is the angle between plane of the coil and magnetic field and  is the angle
between area vector and magnetic field. 2
(a) 1½

31
V  10 V
(b) Static Resistance, rs    10 7 
I  1 X 10 6 A 2
(c) Even a small voltage is sufficient to sweep the minority carriers from one side of the
junction to the other side of the junction. The current is not limited by the magnitude of the
applied voltage but is limited due to the concentration of the minority carrier on either side 1½
of the junction.
(a) 1

31 1
OR

Explanation of working of half wave rectifier. 1


(b) 5 × 1022 - 5 × 1020 =4.95 × 1022
ne ≈ 4.95 × 1022; 1
nh = ni2/ne = 4.75 × 109 ; n-type since ne >> nh 1

(a)Correct Phasor Diagram


1
Derivation of expression for impedence Z  R 2  ( X C  X L ) 2 2
1 L
Q  ½
32 R C
(b)
1 3
Q   6
 45 1½
7 .4 27 X 10

Page-121
QN VALUE
ANSWER KEY
NO. POINTS
(a) labelled diagram of a transformer ½
V N I
Derivation of expression S  S  P
VP N P I S 2½
32 V
OR NS  S NP 1/2
VP
(b)
230
NS  X 4000  400
2300 1½
labeled ray diagram of a refracting telescope

definition for magnifying power ½
33 2
Expression for magnifying power
½+1/2
Limitation of refracting telescope
(a) Basic assumptions
Ray Diagram
derivation of lens – maker’s formula ½
1
(b) For a glass lens in air, n2 = 1.5, n1 = 1, 1½
1 1 1
33 f = +20 cm. Hence, the lens makers formula gives  (1.5  1)(  )
20 R1 R2
OR
For the same glass lens in water, n2 = 1.5, n1 = 4/3. Therefore,
½
1 1.5 1 1
(  1)(  )
fw 4/3 R1 R2 ½
combining these two equations, we find 1
f = + 80 cm

(a)when all the four resister are in same order. 1


(b) The advantage of null point method in a Wheatstone bridge is that the
resistance of galvanometer does not affect the balance point and there 1
is no need to determine current in resistances and galvanometer and the internal
resistance of a galvanometer.
(c) If the student uses large values of R2 and R1, the currents through the arms will be
34 feeble. This will make determination of null point accurately more difficult. 2
OR
(c)By rearrangement P/Q=R/S, so the bridge is balanced. 5ohms resistance between OR
BD can be removed. ½
Calculation of equivalent resistance =2Ω 1
Calculation of current= i=4/2=2A 1/2
(a)Waves diffracted from the edge of the circular obstacle interfere constructively at
1
the centre of the shadow producing a bright spot.
(b) The intensity of interference fringes in a double-slit arrangement is modulated by
the diffraction pattern of each slit. 1
35 (c) intensity pattern with distance from the centre for single slit diffraction. 2
OR OR
The secondary maxima at angular position (n + 1/2) l/a with n = 2, 3, etc. These
become weaker with increasing n, 2
since only one-fifth, one-seventh, etc., of the slit contributes in these cases.
Page-122
CHAPTER WISE QUESTIONS
CHAPTER-1: ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS
1. A soap bubble is given a negative charge, then its radius
(i) Decreases (ii) Increases
(iii) Remains Unchanged (iv) Nothing can be predicted as information is insufficient.
2. There are two metallic spheres of same radii but one is solid and the other is hollow, then:
(i) solid sphere can be given more charge (ii) hollow sphere can be given more charge
(iii) they can be charged equally (maximum) (iv) none of the above
14
3. When 10 electrons are removed from a neutral metal sphere, the charge on the sphere becomes:
(i) 16  C (ii) -16  C (iii) 32  C (iv) -32  C
4. Two similar spheres having +q and –q charge are kept at a certain distance. F force acts between the two. If in the
middle of two spheres, another similar small sphere having +q charge is kept, then it will experiences a force in
magnitude and direction as:
(i) Zero having no direction (ii) 8F towards +q charge
(iii) 8F towards –q charge (iv) 4F towards +q charge
5. Two small conducting spheres of equal radius have charges +10  C and -20  C respectively and placed at a
distance R from each other. They experience force F1. If they are brought in contact and separated to the same
distance, they experience force F2. The ratio of F1 to F2 is:
(i) 1:8 (ii) -8:1 (iii) 1:2 (iv) -2:1
6. Dielectric constant for metal is:
(i) Zero (ii) Infinite (iii) 1 (iv) None of these
7. Equal charges q are placed at the four corners A, B, C and D of a square of length a. The magnitude of the force
on the charge at B will be:
3q 2 q2  1  2 2  q2  1  q2
   2  
 2  4 a 2
(i) 4 0 a (ii) 4 0 a 2  4 0 a
2 2 2
(iii)   0
(iv) 
8. A particle A has charge +q and a particle B has charge +4q with each of them having the same mass m. When
vA
allowed to fall from rest through the same electric potential difference, the ratio of the speed v B will become:
(i) 2:1 (ii) 1:2 (iii) 1:4 (iv) 4:1
9. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric field. The lines of force follow
the path(s) shown in figure as:
(i) 1 (ii) 2 (iii) 3 (iv) 4

10. The electric field due to an electric dipole at a distance r from its centre in axial position is E. If the dipole is
rotated through an angle of 900 about its perpendicular axis, the magnitude of electric field at the same point will be:
(i) E (ii) E/4 (iii) E/2 (iv) 2E
11. An electron of mass me, initially at rest, moves through a certain distance in a uniform electric field in time t 1. A
proton of mass mp, also initially at rest, takes time t2 to move through an equal distance in this uniform electric field.
Neglecting the effect of gravity, the ratio t1/t2 is nearly equal to:
(i) me/mp (ii) (mp/me)1/2 (iii) (me/mp)1/2 (iv) mp/me
12. A charged particle of mass m and charge q is released from rest in an electric field of constant magnitude E. The
KE of the particle after time t is:

Page - 123
Eq 2 m 2 Et 2 E 2q 2 t 2 Eqm
(i) 2t
2
(ii) mq (iii) 2m (iv) 2t
13. A charge q1 exerts some force on a second charge q2. If a third charge q3 is brought near q2, the force exerted by
q1 on q2:
(i) Decreases (ii) Increases (iii) Remains the same
(iv) Increases if q3 is of some sign as q1 and decreases if q3 is of opposite sing as q1
14. The centres of two identical small conducting spheres are 1m apart. They carry charges of opposite kind and
attract each other with a force F. When they are connected by a conducting thin wire they repel each other with a
force F/3. What is the ratio of magnitude of charges carried by the spheres initially?
(i) 1 : 1 (ii) 2 : 1 (iii) 3 : 1 (iv) 4 : 1
15. A wire of linear charge density  passes through a cuboid of length l, breadth b and height h in such a manner
that flux through the cuboid is maximum. The position of wire is now changed, so that the flux through the cuboid
is minimum l>b>h, then the ratio maximum flux to minimum flux will be:
l 2  b2  h2 l 2  b2 h l
(iii) l  b (iv) l  b  h
2 2 2 2 2
(i) h (ii) h
16. Infinite charges of magnitude q each are lying at x = 1, 2, 4, 8 ... meter on X-axis. The value of intensity of
electric field at point x=0 due to these charges will be:
(i) 12  109 q N/C (ii) Zero (iii) 6  109 q N/C (iv) 4  109 q N/C
17. Two point charges q and 2q are placed some distance apart. If the electric field at the location of q be E, then
that the location of 2q will be:
(i) 3E (ii) E/2 (iii) E (iv) 2E
18. Electric charges q, q, -2q are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle ABC of side l. The magnitude of
electric dipole moment of the system is:
(i) ql (ii) 2ql (iii) 3ql (iv) 4ql
19. An electric dipole is kept in non-uniform electric field. It experiences:
(i) a force and a torque (ii) a force but not a torque
(iii) a torque but not a force (iv) neither a force nor a torque
20. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): A small test charge is initially at rest at a point in an electrostatic field of an electric dipole. When
released, it will move along the line of force passing through that point.
Reason (R): The tangent at a point on a line of source gives the direction of the velocity of charged particle at that
point.
21. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): A point charge is brought in an electric field. The field at a nearby point increases whatever nature
of the charge

Page - 124
Reason (R): The electric field is independent upon nature of charge.
22. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Electric field lines never form closed loop.
Reason (R): Work done in a closed path by a conservative force is always zero.
23. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
GAUSS’S THEOREM
The law governing electrostatics is coulomb’s law. In
principle, Coulomb’s law can be used to compute electric
field due to any charge configuration. In practice,
however, it is a formidable task to compute electric fields
due to uniform charge distributions. For charge
distributions involving symmetry German Physicist Carl
Friedrich Gauss gave a new formulation of Coulomb’s
law called Gauss’s theorem which states that the surface
integral of the electrostatics field E over a closed surface
due to any source is proportional to the net charge q contained inside surface, i.e.
𝑞
𝐸⃗ . 𝑑𝑆⃗ =
𝜀
(Where 𝑑𝑆⃗ is an element of area directed along the outward drawn normal to the surface at every point) The integral
is called as electric flux. Any convenient surface symmetrical to charge distribution that we choose to evaluate the
surface integral is called Gaussian surface.
(i) An arbitrary surface encloses a dipole. What is the electric flux through this surface?
(ii) A spherical rubber balloon carries a charge that is uniformly distributed over its surface. As the balloon is
blown up and increases in size, how does the total electric flux coming out of the surface change ? Give reason.
 3 ˆ
(iii) Consider a uniform field  3  10 i N / C . (a) What is the flux of the electric field through a square of 10cm
E
on a side whose plane is parallel to the YZ plane? (b) What is the flux through the same square if the normal
to its plane makes a 600 angle with the X-axis?
OR
A hollow cylindrical box of length 1m and area of cross-section 25 cm 2
is placed in a three dimensional coordinate system as shown in the figure.

ˆ
The electric field in the region is given by E  50 x i , where E is in NC-1
and x is in meters. Find (a) net flux through the cylinder and (b) charge
enclosed by the cylinder.
24. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
MOTION OF A CHARGED PARTICLE IN A UNIFORM ELECTRIC FIELD
A uniform electric field is produced between the two charged plates as shown in figure. If q is the charge of the
particle, it will experience a force F=qE. Hence its acceleration is
𝐹 𝑞𝐸
𝑎= =
𝑚 𝑚

Page - 125
Where m=mass of the charged particle.
The direction of acceleration depends upon the nature of the
charged particle. The trajectory of the charged particle in the
region of electric field is determined by initial velocity and
electric force acting on it.
(i) Write the trajectory of a charged particle when it is
injected (a) parallel to the direction of electric field and
(b) perpendicular to the direction of electric field.
(ii) A proton and an electron are placed freely in an uniform electric field. Which of the particles will have greater
acceleration and why?
(iii) An electron enters the field symmetrically between the plates with a speed v 0.The length of each plate is l
.Find the angle of deviation of the path of the electron as it comes out of the field.
OR
The figure given alongside shows tracks of three charged particles 1, 2 and 3
in a uniform electric field E. Give the signs of three charges. Derive the
expression showing the vertical deflection of charged particle is directly
proportional to the charge to mass ratio.
CHAPTER-2: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE
1. A test charge is q moved without acceleration from A to C. Along the path
from A to B then B to C in electric field E as shown in the figure. The ratio of the
work done between A and C to A to B is
(i) 1:1 (ii) 1:2 (iii) 2:1 (iv) cannot be find

2. Two charges -10µc and + 10µc are located at points A (0, 0, - 5) and B (0, 0, + 5) respectively. How much
work is done in moving a test charge of 2µc from point P (7, 0, 0) to Q (-3, 0, 0)?
(i) 20J (ii) 5J (iii) 2J (iv) 0J
3. The graph shows the variation of voltage V across the plates of two capacitors A
and B versus increase of charge Q stored on them. Which of the two capacitor can
stored more energy for same charge in both.
(i) A (ii) B (iii) Same (iv) cannot say

4. In a parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates, each plate has an area of
6 × 10–3 m2 and the distance between the plates is 4 mm is connected to a 100 V
supply. The battery is disconnected and one 3 mm thick mica sheet (of dielectric
constant = 5) were inserted between the plates. The polarization vector
developed in the dielectric slab is :-
(i) 2x104ϵ0 (ii) 4x104 ϵ0 (iii) 2x103 ϵ0 (iv) 4x103 ϵ0
5. A capacitor of 4 pF is connected as shown in the circuit. The emf of the cell is 5V and internal resistance of
the battery is 0.5 ohm. The amount of charge on the capacitor plates will be
(i) 0 (ii) 4 μC (iii)16 μC (iv) 8 μC

6. A dielectric is placed in between the two parallel plates of a capacitor as


shown in the figure. The dielectric constant of the dielectric being K. If
the initial electric field E, then the new Electric field will be E/k. The
decrease in electric field is due to
(i) Resistance of dielectric (ii) Polarization of dielectric
(iii) due to decrease of capacitance (iv) due to conduction of dielectric.
Page - 126
7. Four charges are arranged at the corners of a square ABCD, of side r as
shown. The potential at the centre O is
(i)k (ii) k (iii) k√2 (iv) k

8. The effective capacitance of the system is


(i) C (ii) 2C (iii) 3C ( iv) 2C/3

9. Two parallel plate capacitors whose capacitances are C and 2 C respectively are joined in parallel. These are
charged to V potential difference. If the battery is now removed and a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K
is filled in between the plates of the capacitor 2 C, then what will be the potential difference across each
capacitor?
(i)V/(K + 2) (ii) 2V/(K + 2) (iii) 3V/(K + 2) (iv) 3V/(2K +1)
10. A network of four capacitors of capacity C each are connected to a battery as
shown in the figure. The ratio of the charges on C1 and C4 is
(i)1/4 (ii)1/3 (iii)3/1 (iv) 4/1

11. Work done to rotate an electric dipole of dipole moment 5Cm in a uniform electric field of 15 N/C from
minimum energy to maximum energy position is
(i) 150J (ii) 75 J (iii) 3J (iv) 15 J
12. A circle of radius R is drawn in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.
VA,VB,VC and VD are respectively the potentials of points A,B,C and D on the circle
then:-
(i) VA>VC,VB=VD (ii) VA<VC,VB =VD
(iii) VA=VC,VB <VD (iv) VA=VC,VB>VD

13. Two infinitely large plane thin parallel sheets having surface charge densities ϭ 1
and ϭ2 such that ϭ1 = ϭ2 = ϭ as shown in the figure. Write the magnitudes of the
net fields in the regions marked III.
(i) 0 (ii) ϭ/ε0 (iii) 2ϭ/ε0 (iv) ϭ/2ε

14. A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a capacitance of 8 pF. The separation between the
plates is now reduced half and the space between them is filled with a medium of dielectric constant
5.Calculate the value of capacitance of the capacitor in second case.
(i) 8pF (ii) 10pF (iii) 80pF (iv) 100pF
15. An air capacitor is given a charge of 2µC raising its potential to 200 V. If on inserting a dielectric medium,
its potential falls to 50 V, what is the dielectric constant of the medium?
(i) 5 (ii) 1 (iii) 2 (iv) 4
16. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false

Page - 127
Assertion (A): Two metal plates having charges Q, –Q face each other at some separation and are dipped into an
oil tank. If the oil is pumped out, the electric field between the plates increases.
Reason (R): Electric field between the plates, Emed = Eair/K
17. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Two concentric charged shells are given. The potential difference between the shells depends on
charge of inner shell
Reason (R): Potential due to charge of outer shell remains same at every point inside the sphere.
18. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Electric field lines are not perpendicular to surface of charged conductor.
Reason (R): The surface of charged conductor is surface of variable potential.
19. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Polar molecules have permanent dipole moment.
Reason (R): In polar molecules, the centres of positive and negative charges coincide even when there is no
external field.
20. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Electric field lines are not perpendicular to surface of charged conductor.
Reason (R): The surface of charged conductor is surface of variable potential.
21. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
The electrical capacitance of a conductor is the measure of its ability to hold electric
charge. For an isolated spherical conductor of radius R having charge Q uniformly
distributed over its entire surface. The potential at any point on the surface of
the spherical conductor will be V= Q/4πε0R. Capacitance of the spherical conductor
situated in vacuum is C= Q/V=4πε0R. Clearly, the capacitance of a spherical
conductor is proportional to its radius.
(i) A spherical conductor of radius 50cm is charged to a potential of 20V. What is the
potential difference between surface and the centre of the sphere?
(ii) How much charge should be placed on a capacitance of 50 pF to raise its potential to l0 5 V?
Page - 128
(iii) If 64 identical spheres of charge q and capacitance C each are
Combined to form a large sphere. Calculate the charge and capacitance of the large sphere.
OR
Calculate radius of an isolated sphere having capacitance 50pF.
22. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
A dielectric slab is a substance which does not allow the flow of
charges through it but permits them to exert electrostatic forces on
one another. When a dielectric slab is placed between the plates,
the field Eo polarizes the dielectric. This induces charge -Qp on the
upper surface and + Qp on the lower surface of the dielectric. These
induced charges set up a field Ep inside the dielectric in the
opposite direction of E⃗0 as shown.
(i) In a parallel plate capacitor, the capacitance increases from 4μF to 200μF on introducing a dielectric
medium between the plates. What is the dielectric constant of the medium?
(ii) A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a capacitance of 8 pF. The separation between the
plates is now reduced half and the space between them is filled with a medium of dielectric constant
5.Calculate the value of capacitance of the capacitor in second case.
(iii) Two identical conducting plates of plate area A are separated by a distance d to form a parallel plate air
capacitor. Now a metal sheet of thickness d/2 is inserted between the plates of the capacitor. Calculate the
ratio of capacitance before the insertion of plate and after the insertion of plate.
OR
(iii) Two condensers of capacities 2C and C are joined in parallel and charged up to potential V. The battery is
removed and the condenser of capacity C is filled completely with a medium of dielectric constant K. Now
what will be The p.d. across the capacitors?
23. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
The potential at any observation point P of a static electric field is
defined as the work done by the external agent (or negative of work
done by electrostatic field) in slowly bringing a unit positive point
charge from infinity to the observation point. Figure shows the
potential variation along the line of charges. Two point charges
Q1and Q2 lie along a line at a distance from each other.

(i) At which of the points 1, 2 and 3 is the electric field is zero?


(ii) The signs of charges Q1 and Q2 respectively are
(iii) (a)Which of the two charges Q1 and Q2 is greater in magnitude?
(b) Is it a conservative or neoconservative force?
OR
Positive and negative point charges of equal magnitude are kept at (0, 0, a2) and (0, 0, −a2) respectively.
The work done by the electric field when another positive point charge is moved from (-a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0).
CHAPTER-3: CURRENT ELECTRICITY

1. Dimension of a block are 1 cm x 1 cm x 100 cm. if specific resistance of its material is 3 × 10 𝛺𝑚 , then the
resistance between the opposite rectangular faces is
(i) 3 × 10 𝛺𝑚
(ii) 3 × 10 𝛺𝑚
(iii)3 × 10 𝛺𝑚
(iv) 3 × 10 𝛺𝑚
2. The drift velocity of the free electrons in a conducting wire carrying a current I is 𝑣. If in a wire of the same
metal, but of double the radius, the current be 2I, then the drift velocity of electrons will be
Page - 129
(i) (ii) (iii) 𝑣 (iv) 4𝑣
3. A cell of emf (E) and internal resistance r is connected across a variable external resistance R. the graph of
terminal potential difference V as a function of R is
(i) (ii)

(iii)
(iv)

4. Two batteries of emf E1 and E2 (E2> E1) and r1 and r2 respectively are connected in
parallel as shown in figure.
(i) The equivalent emf Eeq of the two cells is between E 1 and E2, i.e. E1< Eeq
< E2 .
(ii) The equivalent emf Eeq is smaller than E1.
(iii)The Eeq is given by Eeq = E1 + E2 always.
(iv) Eeq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2
5. The resistance of the wire is 5Ω at 500C and 6Ω at 1000C. the resistance of the wire at 00C will be
(i) 3Ω (ii) 2Ω (iii) 1Ω (iv) 4Ω
6. An electric bulb is rated 220 V – 100 W. The power consumed by it, when operated on 110 V, will be
(i) 25 W (ii) 50 W (iii) 75 W (iv) 40 W
7. The ratio of current density and electric field is called
(i) Resistivity (ii) conductivity (iii) drift velocity (iv) mobility
8. Kirchhoff ‘s junction rule is the reflection of
(i) Conservation of current density vector.
(ii) Conservation of charge.
(iii)Conservation of linear momentum.
(iv) Conservation of energy.
9. A source of emf E=15 V and having negligible internal resistance, is connected to a variable resistance, so that
the current in the circuit increases with time as 𝐼 = 1.2𝑡 + 3 . Then, the total charge that will flow in the first
5 𝑠 will be
(i) 10 C (ii)20 C (iii) 30 C (iv) 40 C
10. The current I and voltage V curves for a given metallic wire at two temperatures T 1
and T2 are shown in the figure. Then
(i) T1> T2 (ii) T1< T2 (iii) T1 = T2 (iv) T1 = 2T2

11. In the following question, two statements are given – one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): The dimensional formula for product of resistance and conductance is same as for dielectric constant.
Reason (R): Both have dimensions of time constant.
Page - 130
12. In the following question, two statements are given – one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Electrons move from a region of higher potential to a region of lower potential.
Reason (R): An electron has less potential energy at a point where potential is higher and vice versa.
13. In the following question, two statements are given – one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): A wire carrying an electric current has no electric field around it.
Reason (R): Rate of flow of electrons in one direction is equal to the rate of flow of protons in opposite direction.
14. In the following question, two statements are given – one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Though large no of free electrons are present in the metal, yet there is no current in the absence of
electric field.
Reason (R): In the absence of electric field electrons move randomly in all directions.
15. In the following question, two statements are given – one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): The value of temperature coefficient of resistance is positive for metals.
Reason (R): The temperature coefficient of resistance for insulators is also positive.
16. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
The flow of charge in a particular direction constitutes the electric current. Current is
measured in ampere. Quantitatively, electric current in a conductor across an area
held perpendicular to the direction of flow of charge is defined as the amount of
charge is flowing across that area per unit time. Current density at a point in a
conductor is the ratio of the current at that point in the conductor to the area of
cross section of the conductor of that point.
The given figure shows a steady current flows in a metallic conductor of non-
uniform cross section. Current density depends inversely on area, so here J 1> J2
as A1< A2.

(i) What is the current flowing through a conductor, if one million electrons are
crossing in one millisecond through a cross section of it?

Page - 131
(ii) A steady current flows through a metallic conductor of non-uniform cross section. Which quantities remain
constant along the conductor?
(iii) The number densities of free electrons in three conductors X, Y, Z are in the ratio 4: 1: 8, and their electrical
conductivities are in the ratio 2: 1: 2. For which conductor will the relaxation time of free electrons be
(a) Maximum (b) Minimum.
OR
How does the current density in a conductor vary with (a) increase in potential gradient (b) increase in temperature?
17. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
According to ohm’s law, the current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference
across the ends of the conductor i. e. 𝐼 ∝ 𝑉 ⇒ = 𝑅, where R is the resistance of the conductor. Electrical resistance
of a conductor is the obstruction posed by the conductor to the flow of electric current through it. It depends upon
length, area of cross section, nature of material and temperature of the conductor. We can write 𝑅 ∝ 𝑜𝑟𝑅 = 𝜌 ,
where ρ is electrical resistivity of the material of the conductor.
(i) Write down the dimensional formula for electrical resistance.
(ii) Specific resistance of a wire depends upon which physical quantities?
(iii) Calculate the resistivity of the material of a wire 1.0 m long, 0.4 mm in diameter and having a resistance of 2.0
ohm?
OR
Draw the resistivity vs temperature graph for copper and silicon.

CHAPTER-4: MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM

1. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field .The torque acting on the loop does not depend upon
the
(i) shape of the loop (ii) area of the loop (iii) value of the current (iv) magnetic field
2. A region has a uniform magnetic field in it. A proton enters into the region with velocity making an angle 45 0
with the direction of magnetic field. In this region proton will move along a path having the shape of a
(i) straight line (ii) circle (iii) helix (iv) spiral
3. The sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer increases with the decrease in
(i) number of turns (ii)Area of the coil (iii) magnetic field (iv) torsional rigidity
4. An electron and a proton are moving along the same direction with the same kinetic energy. They enter a uniform
magnetic field acting perpendicular to their velocities .The dependence of radius of their paths on their masses is:
(i) r ∝ 𝑚 (ii) r∝ √𝑚 (iii) r∝ (iv) r∝

5. A test charge of 1.6× 10 C is moving with a velocity 𝑉⃗ = (4⏞𝑖 + 3 ⏞ ⏞ +4⏞𝑖 ) T.


𝑘 ) m/s in a magnetic field 𝐵⃗ = (3𝑘
The force on this test charge is:
(i) 24⏞𝑗 N (ii) -24⏞𝑗 N ⏞N
(iii) 24𝑘 (iv) 0
6. If the beam of electrons and protons move parallel to each other in the same direction, then they
(i) attract each other (ii) repel each other (iii) no relation (iv) neither attract nor repel
7. The strength of magnetic field at the centre of the circular coil is
(i) (1− )
(ii)
(iii) (1− )
(iv) (1+ )

Page - 132
8. Biot Savart’s law indicate that the moving electrons (velocity V) produces magnetic field B such that
(i) B⊥V
(ii) B∥ 𝑉
(iii) it obeys inverse square law
(iv) it is along the line joining the electron and point of observation.
9. A charged particle after being accelerated through a potential difference ‘V’ enters in a uniform magnetic field
and moves in a circle of radius R .If V is doubled, the radius of the circle will be
(i) 2R (ii) √2R (iii) 4R (iv)

10. If a charged particle moves through a magnetic field perpendicular to it.
(i) both momentum and energy of the particle change.
(ii) momentum as well as energy are constant.
(iii) energy is constant but momentum changes.
(iv) ) momentum is constant but energy changes.
11. Each of these questions contain two statements, Assertion and Reason. Each of these questions also has four
alternative choices, only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select one of the codes (a), (b), (c) and
(d) given below.
(a) Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is a correct explanation for assertion.
(b)Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is not a correct explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct but reason is in correct.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
Assertion (A): A magnetic field produced by a current carrying solenoid is independent of its length and cross
sectional area.
Reason (R): The magnetic field inside the solenoid is uniform
12. Each of these questions contain two statements, Assertion and Reason. Each of these questions also has four
alternative choices, only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select one of the codes (a), (b), (c) and
(d) given below.
(a) Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is a correct explanation for assertion.
(b)Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is not a correct explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct but reason is in correct.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
Assertion (A): The resistance of an ideal voltmeter should be infinite.
Reason (R): The lower resistance of a voltmeter gives a reading lower than the actual potential difference across
the terminals.
13. Each of these questions contain two statements, Assertion and Reason. Each of these questions also has four
alternative choices, only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select one of the codes (a), (b), (c) and
(d) given below.
(a) Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is a correct explanation for assertion.
(b)Both Assertion and reason are correct; reason is not a correct explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct but reason is in correct.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
Assertion (A): Magnetic field cannot change kinetic energy of a moving charge.
Reason (R): Magnetic field cannot change velocity vector.

Page - 133
14. CASE BASED QUESTION:
A galvanometer is a device used to detect current in a circuit.
Principle: When a current carrying coil kept inside a magnetic field, it experience
certain torque.
A pivoted type galvanometer consist of a rectangular coil of fine insulated copper
wire wound on a light aluminium frame. The motion of the coil is controlled by a
pair of hair spring of phosphor-bronze. The springs provide the restoring torque
and serve as current leads. A light aluminium pointer attached to the coil measures
its deflection on suitable scale. The current I in the galvanometer coil is given as
I= 𝛼
Because of the presence of sin𝜃 , the deflection 𝛼 of the galvanometer coil is not quite proportional to the current I.
Hence a radial magnetic field is provided.
So that 𝜃 = 90 . So I = 𝛼.
(i) Write the expression of torque acting on the galvanometer coil?
(ii) Why do we prefer phosphor bronze alloy for the suspension wire?
(iii)The current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer is 5division/mA and voltage sensitivity is 20
divisions/volt. Find the resistance of the galvanometer.
OR
The current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer is increased by 20% and resistance increases by 1.5 times
.How will the voltage sensitivity of the galvanometer be affected?

15. CASE BASED QUESTION:


When a charge particle q moves inside a magnetic field𝐵⃗ with velocity 𝑉⃗, it experience force. The force is given as
𝐹⃗ =q (𝑉⃗ × 𝐵⃗ ). When the initial velocity is parallel to the magnetic field, F will be zero. Charge particle continues
to move with constant velocity along the line of force.
When the initial velocity is perpendicular to the magnetic field, maximum force will be experienced by the particle.
It is given as F = qVB. The particle undergoes circular motion due to this force. When the particle enters the magnetic
field at certain angle 𝜃 with the direction of magnetic field it moves along helical path.
(i) Write the expression for radius of circular path along which the particle moves, when it enters the magnetic
field perpendicularly.
(ii) Write the expression for period of revolution of the charged particle that enters the magnetic field
perpendicularly.
(iii) An electron and a proton moving with the same speed enter the same magnetic field region at right angle to
the direction of the field. For which of the two particle, radius of circular path will be smaller.
OR
A proton and an electron travelling along parallel path enters a region of uniform magnetic field, acting
perpendicular to their paths. Which of them will move in a circular path with higher frequency.
CHAPTER-5: MAGNETISM

1. If the magnetizing field on a ferromagnetic material is increased, its permeability.


(i) is decreased (ii) is increased
(iii) is unaffected (iv) may be increased or decreased.
2. The magnetic susceptibility of an ideal diamagnetic substance is
(i) +1 (ii) 0 (iii) -1 (iv) ∞
3. The best material for the ore of a transformer is
(i) stainless steel

Page - 134
(ii) mild steel
(iii) hard steel
(iv) soft iron
4. Domain formation is the necessary feature of
(i) diamagnetism (ii) paramagnetism (iii) ferromagnetism. (iv) all of these.
5. A bar magnet is equivalent to
(i) toroid carrying current (ii) straight conductor carrying current
(iii) solenoid carrying current (iv) circular coil carrying current
6. If the magnetic dipole moment of an atom of diamagnetic material, paramagnetic material and ferromagnetic
material are denoted by μd, μp and μf respectively, then:
(i)μp=0 and μf≠0 (ii)μd≠0 and μp=0
(iii)μp≠0 and μf≠0 (iv) μd=0 and μp≠0
7. A bar magnet of length 3cm has points A and B along its axis at distances of24cm and 48cm on the opposite
sides. Ratio of magnetic fields at these points will be:
(i) 8
(ii) 4
(iii) 3
(iv) 1/2√2
8. The magnetic susceptibility of paramagnetic materials is:
(i) Positive, but very high
(ii) Negative and very high
(iii) Positive, but small
(iv) Negative
9. A short bar magnet, placed with its axis at 30° with an external magnetic field of 0.16 T, experiences a torque of
magnitude 0.032 J. The magnetic moment of the bar magnet is (in units of J/T)-
(i) 0.4
(ii) 0.2
(iii) 0.5
(iv) 4
10. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): Copper is a paramagnetic substance.
REASON (R): Paramagnetic substance when placed in a magnetic field is feebly magnetized in a direction
opposite to that of the magnetizing field.
11. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): Susceptibility is defined as the ratio of intensity of magnetization to magnetic intensity H.
REASON (R): Greater the value of susceptibility, the smaller the value of the intensity of magnetisation I.
12. Two statements are given, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(c) A is true but R is false
Page - 135
(d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): For a perfectly diamagnetic substance permeability is always one.
REASON (R): The degree or measure of a material to get magnetized in a magnetizing field is called magnetic
permeability.
13. CASE BASED QUESTION:
By analogy to Gauss's law of electrostatics, we can write Gauss's law of magnetism as
∮B⃗⋅ds=μ0minsidewhere B⃗⋅ds is the magnetic flux and m inside is the net pole
strength inside the closed surface. We do not have an isolated magnetic pole in
nature. At least none has been found to exist till date. The smallest unit of the
source of magnetic field is a magnetic dipole where the net magnetic pole is zero.
Hence, the net magnetic pole enclosed by any closed surface is always zero. Correspondingly, the flux of the
magnetic field through any closed surface is zero.
a) Write the expression for net magnetic flux through any closed surface, kept in a magnetic field.
b) State the Coulomb’s law of magnetic force.
c) A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 J/ T lies aligned with the direction of a uniform magnetic field of
0.22 T. What is the amount of work required by an external torque to turn the magnet, so as to align its magnetic
moment i) normal to the field direction, ii) opposite to the field direction?
OR
What is the torque on the magnet in the above cases (i) and (ii)?
14. CASE BASED QUESTION:
When the atomic dipoles are aligned partially or fully, there is a net magnetic moment in the direction of the field
in any small volume of the material. The actual magnetic field inside material placed in magnetic field is the sum of
the applied magnetic field and the magnetic field due to magnetisation. This field is called magnetic intensity (H).
H= B/ μ0 – M, where M is the magnetisation of the material, μ0is the permittivity of vacuum and B is the total
magnetic field. The measure that tells us how a magnetic material responds to an external field is given by a
dimensionless quantity is appropriately called the magnetic susceptibility: for a certain class of magnetic materials,
intensity of magnetisation is directly proportional to the magnetic intensity.
a) A bar magnet has length 3 cm, cross-sectional area 2 cm 2 and magnetic moment 3 Am2. Find out the
intensity of magnetization of the bar magnet.
b) The relative permeability of iron is 6000. What will be its magnetic susceptibility?
c) In what way, the behavior of a diamagnetic material is different from that of a paramagnetic, when
kept in an external magnetic field?
OR
Out of two magnetic materials, A has relative permeability slightly greater than unity while B has less
then unity. Identify the nature of the materials A and B. Will their susceptibility be positive or negative?

CHAPTER-6: ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INDUCTION


1. An electron moves along the line AB, which lies in the same plane as a circular loop of conducting wires as shown
in the diagram. What will be the direction of current induced if any, in the loop
(i) No current will be induced
(ii) The current will be clockwise
(iii) The current will be anticlockwise
(iv) The current will change direction as the electron passes by A B

2. In the following figure, the magnet is moved towards the coil with a speed v and induced emf is e. If magnet and
coil recede away from one another each moving with speed v, the induced emf in the coil will be
Page - 136
(i) e
(ii) 2e
N S
(iii) e/2
v
(iv) 4e
3. The magnetic flux through a circuit of resistance R changes by an amount  in time t , Then the total quantity
of electric charge Q, which passing during this time through any point of the circuit is given by

Q
(i) t

Q R
(ii) t

Q R
(iii) t

Q
(iv) R

4. An aeroplane in which the distance between the tips of wings is 50 m is flying horizontally with a speed of 360
4 2
km/hr over a place where the vertical components of earth magnetic field is 2.0  10 weber / m . The potential
difference between the tips of wings would be
(i) 0.1 V (ii) 1.0 V
(iii) 0.2 V (iv) 0.01 V
5. A conducting wire is moving towards right in a magnetic field B. The direction of induced current in the wire is
shown in the figure. The direction of magnetic field will
(i) In the plane of paper pointing towards right
(ii) In the plane of paper pointing towards left B i v

(iii) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and down-wards


(iv) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and upwards
6. The north and south poles of two identical magnets approach a coil, containing a condenser, with equal speeds
from opposite sides. Then
Rear side
(i) Plate 1 will be negative and plate 2 positive
1
(ii) Plate 1 will be positive and plate 2 negative S N S N
v 2 v
(iii) Both the plates will be positive Observer
Front side
(iv) Both the plates will be negative
7. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction B tesla with its plane normal to the
 dr 
 
field. Now, the radius of the loop starts shrinking at the rate  dt  . Then the induced emf at the instant when the
radius is r, is
 dr   dr 
rB   2 rB  
(i)  dt  (ii)  dt 
2
 dB   r 2   dr 
r 
2
  B

 dt   2   dt 
(iii) (iv)
8. In the following circuit, the bulb will become suddenly bright if
(i) Contact is made or broken
(ii) Contact is made
(iii) Contact is broken
(iv) Won't become bright at all
9. If the current 30 A flowing in the primary coil is made zero in 0.1 sec. The emf induced in the secondary coil is
1.5 volt. The mutual inductance between the coils is
Page - 137
(i) 0.05H (ii) 1.05 H (iii) 0.1 H (iv) 0.2 H
10. In the figure magnetic energy stored in the coil is
2H

10 V 2
(i) Zero (ii) Infinite
(iii) 25 joules (iv) None of the above
11. An ac generator produced an output voltage E  170 sin 377 t volts , where tis in seconds. The frequency of ac voltage
is
(i) 50 Hz (ii) 110 Hz (iii) 60Hz (iv) 230 Hz
12. A rectangular coil ABCD is rotated anticlockwise with a uniform angular velocity about the axis shown in
diagram below. The axis of rotation of the coil as well as the magnetic field B are horizontal. The induced emf.
in the coil would be maximum when D Axis

(i) The plane of the coil is horizontal


C
(ii) The plane of the coil makes an angle of 45° with the magnetic field A

(iii) The plane of the coil is at right angles to the magnetic field
B
(iv) The plane of the coil makes an angle of 30° with the magnetic field
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Acceleration of a vertically falling magnet through a horizontal metallic ring is less than g.
Reason (R): Current induced in the ring opposes the fall of magnet.
14. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): When a rod moves in a transverse magnetic field, an emf is induced in the rod; the end becomes
magnetic with end A positive.
Reason (R): A Lorentz force evB acts on free electrons, so electrons move from B to A, thus by making end A
positive and end B negative.
15. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): Only a change of magnetic flux will maintain an induced current in the coil.
Reason (R): The presence of a large magnetic flux will maintain an induced current in the coil.
16. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
A wire in the form of a loop is connected to a sensitive current meter or galvanometer as
shown in figure. When a bar magnet is pushed through the coil, the needle in the
galvanometer will move, indicating an induced current. However, we stop the motion of
the bar magnet, the current returns to zero. The field from the magnet will only induce a
current when it is increasing or decreasing.
Page - 138
(a) Due to which phenomenon, the current is induced in the coil, when a bar magnet is pushed through it?
(b) The total number of magnetic field lines crossing the surface of the coil normally is called
(c) If we pull the bar magnet back out from the coil, in which direction the needle of galvanometer deflects.
OR
If the bar magnet remains stationary inside the coil, then in which direction the needle of galvanometer deflects.
17. CASE BASED QUESTIONS
Transformers are electrical devices consisting of two or
more coils of wire used to transfer electrical energy by
means of a changing magnetic field. A single-phase
voltage transformer basically consists of two electrical
coils of wire, one called the ‘primary coil’ and another
called the ‘secondary coil’. When a current flow through
the primary coil, it produces a magnetic field which
produces magnetic flux through coils. If the current in the
coil P is varied, the magnetic flux linked with the coil S changes which induces an emf and hence a current in it.
(a) Transformer works in which principle?
(b) What is the unit of coefficient of mutual induction?
(c) An emf of 0.5 V is developed in the secondary coil, when current in the primary coil changes from 5 A to 2
A in 300 milliseconds. Calculate the mutual induction of the two coils.
OR
If number of turns of solenoids increases, then what is its mutual induction?
CHAPTER-7: ALTERNATE CURRENT

1. The rms value of potential difference V shown in the figure is


(i)

(ii) V0
(iii)

(iv)
2. If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A, the value of the current 1/300 seconds after its value becomes
zero is
(i) 5√2 A

(ii) 5 A

(iii) 5/6 A
(iv) 5/ √2 A
3. A 44 mH inductor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz ac supply. The rms value of the current in the circuit is
(i) 12.8 A
(ii) 13.6 A
(iii)15.92 A
(iv) 19.5 A
4. To reduce the resonant frequency in an LCR series circuit with a generator
(i) the generator frequency should be reduced
(ii) another capacitor should be added in parallel to the first
(iii) the iron core of the inductor should be removed
(iv) dielectric in the capacitor should be removed

Page - 139
5. The output of a step down transformer is measured to be 24 V when connected to a 12 watt light bulb. The
value of the peak current is
(i) A

(ii) √2A
(iii) 2 A
(iv) 2√2A
6. The selectivity of a series LCR ac circuit is large, when
(i) L is large and R is large
(ii) Lis small and R is small
(iii) L is large and R is small
(iv) L=R
7. In the circuit shown in figure, what will be the reading of the
voltmeter?
(i) 300 V
(ii) 900 V
(iii) 200 V
(iv) 400 V
8. The frequency of an alternating current is 50 Hz. The minimum time taken by it in reaching from zero to
peak value is
(i) 5 m s
(ii) 10 ms
(iii) 20 ms
(iv) 50 ms
9. The power factor of the circuit is as shown in the figure
(i) 0.2
(ii) 0.4
(iii) 0.8
(iv) 0.6
10. In the series LCR circuit, the plot of Imvs𝜔 is shown in the figure. The bandwidth of this plot will be
(i) Zero
(ii) 0.1 rad s-1
(iii) 0.2 rad s-1
(iv) 0.4 rad s-1

11. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): The capacitive reactance limits the amplitude of the current in a purely capacitive
circuit.
Reason (R): Capacitive reactance is proportional to the frequency and the capacitance.
12. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A

Page - 140
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): The power in an ac circuit is minimum if the circuit has only a resistor.
Reason (R): Power of a circuit is independent of the phase angle.
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
ASSERTION (A): Resonance is exhibited by a circuit only if both L and C are present in the circuit.
Reason (R): Only then the voltage across L and C cancel each other, both being out of phase.
14. CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS:
You are given three circuit elements X, Y and Z. When the element X is connected across an ac source of
given voltage, the current and the voltage are in the same phase. When the element Y is connected in series
with X across the source, voltage is ahead of the current in phase by π/4. But the current is ahead of voltage
by π/4 when Z is connected in series with X across the source.
(i) Identify the circuit elements X, Y and Z?
(ii)When all the three elements are connected in series across the same source, determine the impedance
of the circuit.
(iii) Draw a plot of the current vs the frequency of the applied source and mention the significance of this
plot. OR
Plot a graph showing variation of capacitive reactance and inductive reactance with the change in the
frequency of the AC source.
15. CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS:
Amit had a high tension power erected on his farm land. He kept complaining to the authorities to remove
it as it was occupying a large portion of his land. His uncle, who was a teacher, explained to him the need
for erecting these towers for efficient transmission power. As Amit realized its significance, he stopped
complaining.
(i) Why is it necessary to transport power at high voltage?
(ii) A low power factor implies large power loss. Explain.
(iii) Define power factor. State the condition under which it is (a) maximum and (b) minimum.
OR
In a series LCR circuit, obtain the condition under which (a) the impedance of the circuit is minimum and
(b) wattles current flows in the circuit.
CHAPTER-8: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE

1. In electromagnetic waves the phase difference between electric and magnetic field vectors are
(i) zero
(ii) 𝜋/4
(iii) 𝜋/2
(iv) π
2. Which of the following has minimum wavelength?
(i) Blue light
(ii) γ-rays

Page - 141
(iii) infrared rays
(iv) microwave
3. The correct option, if speeds of gamma rays, X-rays and microwave are V g, Vx anVm respectively will be.
(i) Vg >Vx >Vm
(ii) Vg <Vx <Vm
(iii) Vg >Vx >Vm
(iv) Vg = Vx = Vm
.4. Which of the following has maximum penetrating power?
(i) Ultraviolet radiation
(ii) Microwaves
(iii) γ-rays
(iv) Radio waves
5. Electromagnetic waves travelling in a medium having relative permeability μ r = 1.3 and relative permittivity
Er = 2.14. The speed of electromagnetic waves in medium must be
(i) 1.8 × 108 ms-1
(ii) 1.8 × 104ms1
(iii) 1.8 × 106ms1
(iv) 1.8 × 10² ms-1
6. The quantity √𝜇0𝜀0 represents
(i) speed of sound
(ii) speed of light in vacuum
(iii) speed of e.m. waves
(iv) inverse of speed of light in vacuum
7. In electromagnetic wave if ue and um are mean electric and magnetic energy densities respectively, then

8. Which of the following is called heat radiation?


(i) X-rays
(ii) γ-rays
(iii) Infrared radiation
(iv) Microwave
9. From Maxwell’s hypothesis, a charging electric field gives rise to
(i) an electric field.
(ii) an induced emf.
(iii) a magnetic field.
(iv) a magnetic dipole.
10. The ultra-high frequency band of radio waves in electromagnetic wave is used as in
(i) television waves
(ii) cellular phone communication
(iii) commercial FM radio
(iv) both (i) and (iii)
11. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Page - 142
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false

Assertion (A): An induced current has a direction such that the magnetic field due to the current opposes the change
in the magnetic flux that induces the current.
Reason (R): Above statement is in accordance with conservation of energy.
12. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Acceleration of a magnet falling through a long solenoid decreases.
Reason (R): The induced current produced in a circuit always flow in such direction that it opposes the change to
the cause that produced it.
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer
to these questions from the codes (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Figure shows a horizontal solenoid connected to a battery and
a switch. A copper ring is placed on a smooth surface, the axis of the ring being
horizontal. As the switch is closed, the ring will move away from the solenoid.
Reason (R): Induced emf in the ring, e=-dΦ/dt
14. CASE BASED QUESTIONS:
Electromagnetic radiation is a natural phenomenon found in almost all areas
of daily life, from radio waves to sunlight to x-rays. Laser radiation – like
all light – is also a form of electromagnetic radiation. Electromagnetic
radiation that has a wavelength between 380 nm and 780 nm is visible to the
human eye and is commonly referred to as light. At wavelengths longer than
780 nm, optical radiation is termed infrared (IR) and is invisible to the eye.
At wavelengths shorter than 380 nm, optical radiation is termed ultraviolet
(UV) and is also invisible to the eye. The term “laser light” refers to a much
broader range of the electromagnetic spectrum that just the visible spectrum, anything between 150 nm up to 11000
nm (i.e. from the UV up to the far IR). The term laser is an acronym which stands for “light amplification by
stimulated emission of radiation”.
Einstein explained the stimulated emission. In an atom, electron may move to higher energy level by absorbing a
photon. When the electron comes back to the lower energy level it releases the same photon. This is called
spontaneous emission. This may also so happen that the excited electron absorbs another photon, releases two
photons and returns to the lower energy state. This is known as stimulated emission.
Laser emission is therefore a light emission whose energy is used, in lithotripsy, for targeting and ablating the stone
inside human body organ.
Apart from medical usage, laser is used for optical disk drive, printer, barcode reader etc.
(i) Write the following radiations in ascending order in respect of their frequencies;
X-rays, Microwaves, UV rays and radio waves.
(ii) Which part of electromagnetic spectrum has largest penetrating power?
Page - 143
(iii) The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by = (8 × 10 -6) sin [2 × 10-11 t + 300
π x] T
(a) Calculate the wavelength of the electro-magnetic wave.
(b) Write down the expression for the oscillating electric field.
OR
How are infrared waves produced? Why are these referred to as ‘heat waves’? Write their one important use.

15. CASE BASED QUESTIONS:


According to Maxwell’s electromagnetic equations it has been proved
that electric and magnetic field vectors are perpendicular to each other
and also perpendicular to the direction of propagation as shown in the
figure below. If Ex is the electric field along X axis, then By will be the
direction of magnetic field along y axis and both which are perpendicular
to the z axis showing direction of propagation. The light waves are also
the electromagnetic waves and may travels through vacuum also. So, we
can find the velocity of a light traveling through the material medium
having permittivity € and magnetic permeability u as V = 1/√ɛμ
In this way, we proved that velocity of light also depends on the electrical
and magnetic properties of that medium through which it is traveling. The velocity of light which is constant
everywhere is having value as 3*108m/s.The most technological importance of electromagnetic waves is that they
are having strong capacity to take energy from one place to another place. The best examples are radio waves, TV
signals which also carry energy from their broadcasting stations. Also, life is possible on the earth only because of
the sunlight coming from the sun to the earth which also carry energy and it is nothing but the electromagnetic
waves. Due to which electromagnetic waves are considered as the transverse waves.
(i)Write the relation for the speed for electromagnetic waves in terms of the amplitudes of electric and magnetic
fields.
(ii) How do you convince yourself that electromagnetic waves carry energy and momentum?
(iii) A capacitor, made of two parallel plates each of plate area A and separation d, is being charged by an
external ac source. Show that the displacement current inside the capacitor is the same as the current charging
the capacitor.
OR
When an ideal capacitor is charged by a dc battery, no current flows. However, when an ac source is used,
the current flows continuously. How does one explain this, based on the concept of displacement current?
CHAPTER-9: RAY OPTICS
1. A point source of light at the surface of a sphere causes a parallel beam of light to emerge from the opposite
surface of the sphere. The refractive index of material of sphere is:
i. 1.5
ii. 1.67
iii. 2
iv. 2.5
2. When a plane mirror is rotated through an angle 30 then the reflected ray turns through the angle:
i. 30
ii. 60
iii. 90
iv. 120

Page - 144
3. An equi-convex lens is cut into two halves along (a) YO𝑌 | and(b) 𝑋𝑂𝑋 |
as shown in the figure. Let 𝑓, 𝑓 | , 𝑓 || be the focal lengths of complete lens,
of each half in case (a) and of each half in case(b), respectively,
Choose the correct stamen from the following:
i. 𝑓 | = 2𝑓, 𝑓 || = 𝑓
ii. 𝑓 | = 2𝑓, 𝑓 || = 2𝑓
iii. 𝑓 | = 𝑓, 𝑓 || = 𝑓
iv. 𝑓 | = 𝑓, 𝑓 || = 2𝑓
4. A concave mirror of focal length 𝑓 is placed at a distance d from a convex lens of focal length 𝑓 . A
beam of light coming from infinity and falling on this convex lens concave mirror combination returns to
infinity. The distance d must equal to
i. 𝑓 +𝑓
ii. −𝑓 + 𝑓
iii. 2𝑓 + 𝑓
iv. −2𝑓 + 𝑓
5. Absolute refractive indices of glass and water are 3/2 and 4/3. The ratio of velocity of light in glass and
water will be;
i. 4:3
ii. 8:7
iii. 8:9
iv. 3:4
6. A ray of light travels from an optically denser to rarer medium. The critical angle for the 2 media is C. The
maximum possible deviation of the ray will be:
i. Π-C
ii. Π-2C
iii. 2C
iv. +𝐶
7. The refracting angle of a prism is A and the refractive index of material of prism is cot (A/2). The angle
of minimum deviation is
i. 180 − 3𝐴
ii. 180 + 2𝐴
iii. 90 − 𝐴
iv. 180 − 2𝐴
8. For a small angled prism, angle of prism A, angle of minimum deviation δ varies
with the refractive index of prism as shown in the graph.
i. Point P corresponds to µ=1/2
ii. Slope of the line PQ=A/2
iii. Slope=A
iv. None of the above statement is true
9. The ray diagram could be correct
i. if 𝑛 = 𝑛 = 𝑛
ii. if 𝑛 = 𝑛 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑛 < 𝑛
iii. if 𝑛 = 𝑛 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑛 > 𝑛
iv. under no circumstances
10. A point source of light is placed at a distance of 2f from a converging lens of focal length f. The intensity
on the other side of lens is maximum at a distance
i. f
ii. 2f
iii. between f and 2f
Page - 145
iv. More than 2f
11. If focal length of objective lens is increased then magnifying power of:
i. microscope will increase but that of telescope will decrease
ii. microscope and telescope both will increase
iii. microscope and telescope both will decrease
iv. microscope will decrease but that of telescope will increase
12. An astronomical telescope in normal adjustment receives light from a distant source S. The tube length is
now decreased slightly, then
i. a virtual image S will be formed at a finite distance
ii. no image will be formed
iii. a small, real image S will be formed behind the eye-piece far away from it.
iv. A large real image S will be formed behind the eye-piece far away from it.
13. If the telescope is reversed i.e. seen from objective side, then
i. object will appear very small
ii. object will appear very large
iii. there will be no effect on the image formed by the telescope
iv. image will be slightly greater than the earlier one.
14. In a reflecting astronomical telescope, if the objective(a spherical mirror) is replaced by a parabolic mirror
of the same focal length and aperture, then
i. the final image will be erect
ii. the larger will be obtained
iii. the telescope will gather more light
iv. spherical aberration will be absent
15. The length of the compound microscope 14cm. The magnifying power for relaxed eye is 25. If the focal
length of eye lens is 5cm, then the object distance for objective lens will be:
i. 1.8cm
ii. 1.5cm
iii. 2.1cm
iv. 2.4cm
16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true R is false.
(d) A is false R is also false.
Assertion (A): A total reflecting prism is used to erect the inverted image without deviation.
Reason (R): Ray of light incident parallel to base of prism emerge out as parallel rays.
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true R is false.
(d) A is false R is also false.
Assertion(A): The formula containing u, v, and f for a spherical mirror is valid only for mirror sizes which
are very small compared to their radii of curvature.
Reason(R): Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane surface, but not for large spherical surfaces.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true R is false.
Page - 146
(d) A is false R is also false.
Assertion (A): If objective and eye lenses of a microscope are interchanged, then it can work as telescope.
Reason(R): The objective lens of telescope has small focal length
19. Case Study Based Questions:
A compound microscope consists of 2
converging lenses. One of them, of smaller
aperture and smaller focal length is caller
objective and the other of slightly larger aperture
and slightly larger focal length is called eye-
piece. Both the lenses are fitted in a tube with an
arrangement to vary the distance between them.
A tiny object is placed in front of the objective at
a distance slightly greater than its focal length.
The objective produces the image of object
which acts an object for eye-piece. The eye-piece in turn produces the final magnified image.

i. Why is the focal length of an objective in compound microscope little shorter than the focal length
of eye-piece?
ii. Does the magnifying power of a compound microscope depend upon the colour of light used?
iii. You are given two converging lenses of focal lengths 1.25cm and 5cm to design a compound
microscope. If it is desired to have a magnification of 30, find the separation between the objective
and eye-piece.
20. Case Study Based Questions:
The table below lists indices of refraction for many optical media.
Clear air 1.0003
Ice(transparent) 1.31
Water 1.333
Ethyl alcohol 1.36
Zircon 1.923
Rutile 2.907
Gallium phosphate 3.50
These values provide a measure of the relative speed of light wave in a particular medium. Ice, water and
ethyl alcohol have almost same indices of refraction. It also refers to the fact that relative speeds of light
waves is almost same in them. Vacuum and air also have most same refractive indices. It means that
relative speeds of light in vacuum and air are almost same.
A study is aimed to ascertain cheaper materials to replace costlier materials for different substitutes of
diamonds. This table is also used to find critical angle of materials.
i. Which material(s) can roughly substitute a diamond? Take the refractive index of diamond as
2.417.
ii. Do a material having high physical density (mass per unit volume) has high optical density?
iii. What is the critical angle for diamond air boundary?
CHAPTER-10: WAVE OPTICS

1. A single slit diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light. What happened the red light is
replaced by the blue light?
(i) There is no change in diffraction pattern.
(ii) Diffraction fringes become narrower and crowded
(iii) Diffraction fringes become broader and farther apart
(iv) The diffraction pattern disappear

Page - 147
2. In Young double slit experiment, a minimum is obtained when the phase difference of the
superposing waves, is (n ∈ l):
(i) nπ (ii) (n + 1/2)π
(iii) (2n + 1)π (iv) zero
3. A plane wave front is incident on convex lens, what is the shape of the refracted wave front?
(i) Plane (ii) cylindrical
(iii) spherical converging type (iv) spherical diverging type.
4. In Young’s double-slit experiment using the monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the intensity of
light at a point on the screen where path difference is λ, is K units. What is the intensity of light at a
point where path difference is ?
(i)k (ii) k/4 (iii) k/3 (iv) 0
5. The intensity is directly proportional to the
(i) Cube of the amplitude
(ii) Amplitude
(iii) Square of the amplitude
(iv) None
6. When the phase difference between the displacement produced by the waves does not change with
time then that two sources are called as
(i) Collinear sources
(ii) Coherent sources
(iii) Both a and b
(iv) None
7. Two coherent sources of different intensities send waves which interfere. The ratio of maximum
intensity to minimum intensity is 25:1. The intensities of the sources are in the ratio
(i) 25:1 (ii) 5:1 (iii) 9:4 (iv) 625:1
8. What is the distance for which ray optics is a good approximation for an aperture of 4mm and
wavelength 400 nm?
(i) 10m (ii) 20m (iii) 40m (iv) 50cm
9. What happens, if the monochromatic light used in Young’s double slit experiment is replaced by white
light?
(i) No fringes are observed.
(ii) All bright fringes become while.
(iii) All bright fringes have colour between violet and red.
(iv) Only the central fringe is white and all other fringes are coloured.
10. A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm, is used to obtain interference
fringes in a Young’s double-slit experiment. Here separation between the two slits is given as 2mm and
screen is placed at a distance of 1.2m. What is the least distance from the central maximum where the
bright fringes due to both the wavelengths coincide?
(i) 1.56mm (ii) 1.17mm (iii) 1.60mm (iv) 1.72mm.
11. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. a) Both A and R are
true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion: When a light wave travels from a rarer to a denser medium, it loses speed. The reduction in
speed imply a reduction in energy carried by the light wave.
Reason: The energy of a wave is proportional to velocity of wave.

Page - 148
12. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. a) Both A and R are
true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): For best contrast between maxima and minima in the interference pattern of Young’s
double slit experiment, the intensity of light emerging out of the two slits should be equal.
Reason (R): The intensity of interference pattern is proportional to square of amplitude.
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): In Young’s experiment, the fringe width for dark fringes is different from that for white
fringes.
Reason (R): In Young’s double slit experiment the fringes are performed with a source of white light,
then only black and bright fringes are observed.
14. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from some distance, a bright
spot is seen at the centre of shadow of the obstacle.
Reason (R): Destructive interference occurs at the centre of the shadow.
15. Case Study Based Questions.
When a monochromatic light source is placed behind a
single slit, the light is diffracted producing two light
sources at the double slits A and B. Since both light
sources originate from the same primary source, they
are coherent and will therefore create an observable
interference pattern. Both diffracted light from the
double slits create an interference pattern made up of
bright and dark fringes. The wavelength of the light can
be calculated from the interference pattern and
experiment set up. These are related using the double-slit equation
The fringe separation between two consecutive dark or bright fringes =
(i)Write the conditions of sustained interference.
(ii) If the single slit will be closer to the double slits how the interference be affected?
(iii) In a YDS experiment when a monochromatic light of wavelength 5000Å is used the width of the
fringe is 5mm is produced. If the entire apparatus is dipped in a liquid of refractive index = 1.25, then
what will be the new fringe width?
OR

Page - 149
In YDS experiment the two slits are made 1mm apart and the screen is placed 1m away. What should be
the width of each slit be to obtain 10 maxima of the double slit pattern within the central maximum of
the single slit pattern?
16. Case Study Based Questions.
When light from a monochromatic source is incident on a single
narrow slit, it gets diffracted and a pattern of alternate bright and dark
fringes is obtained on screen, called "Diffraction Pattern" of single slit.
In diffraction pattern of single slit, it is found that,
(I) Central bright fringe is of maximum intensity and the intensity of
any secondary bright fringe decreases with increase in its order.
(II) Central bright fringe is twice as wide as any other secondary bright
or dark fringe.
(i) To observe diffraction, what should be the size of the obstacle?
(ii) A diffraction pattern is obtained by using a beam of red light. What will happen, if the red light is
replaced by the blue light?
(iii) A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a parallel beam of light of wavelength 6000 A and
diffraction bands are observed on a screen 0.5 m from the slit. The distance of the third dark band from
the central bright band is
OR
Light of wavelength 600 nm is incident normally on a slit of width 0.2 mm. The angular width of central
maxima in the diffraction pattern is (measured from minimum to minimum)
CHAPTER-11: DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION

1. Work function ϕo for a metal will change, if it is


(i) heated
(ii) cooled
(iii) coated with some other metal
(iv) All of the above
2. In the phenomenon of electric discharge through gases at low pressure, the coloured glow in the tube
appears as a result of
(i) oscillation of electrons in the atoms
(ii) collision between the atoms of the gas
(iii) collision between the charged particles emitted from the cathode and atoms of the gas
(iv) collision between different electrons of the atoms of the gas
3. In an experiment on photoelectric effect with the increase in potential difference of emitter and collector
plate, keeping the frequency and intensity of the light fixed, the photoelectric current
(i) increases
(ii) decreases
(iii) remains constant
(iv) increases initially and then becomes constant
4. Consider a beam of electrons(each electron with energy Eo) incident on a metal surface kept in an
evacuated chamber, then
(i) no electrons will be emitted as only photons can emit electrons
(ii) electrons can be emitted but all with energy Eo
(iii) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of Eo-ϕ (ϕ is the work function)
(iv) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of Eo

Page - 150
5. The formula for kinetic mass of a moving photon is (where, h is plank’s constant and ν, λ, c are frequency,
wavelength and speed of photon respectively.)
(i) hν/λ
(ii) hλ/e
(iii) hν/e
(iv) h/cλ
6. The wavelength of a photon needed to a remove a proton from a nucleus with is bound to the nucleus with
1 MeV energy is nearly
(i) 1.2nm
(ii) 1.2x10-3 nm
(iii) 1.2x10-6 nm
(iv) 1.2x10 nm
7. If all the following particles are moving with the same velocity, then the particle of maximum momentum
will be
(i) β-particle
(ii) proton
(iii) α-particle
(iv) neutron
8. An electron is moving with an initial velocity v = v0î and is in a magnetic field B = B0ĵ. Then, its de-
Broglie wavelength
(i) remains constant
(ii) increases with time
(iii) decreases with time
(iv) increases and decreases periodically
9. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle of kinetic energy K is λ. What will be the wavelength of the
particle, if its kinetic energy is K/9
(i) λ
(ii) 2λ
(iii) 3λ
(iv) 4λ
10. A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-particle have same energy. Then, their de-Broglie wavelengths
compare as
(i) λp = λn ˃ λe ˃ λα
(ii) λα ˂ λp = λn ˂ λe
(iii) λe ˂ λp = λn ˃ λα
(iv) λe = λp = λn = λα
11. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Heinrich Hertz observed that, high voltage spark across detector loop were enhanced when
the emitter plate was illuminated by UV-light.
Reason (R): Light shining on the metal surface facilitate the escape of free electrons.
12. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
Page - 151
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): When ultraviolet light is incident on a photocell, its stopping potential is V 0 and the
maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is Kmax. When the ultraviolet light is replaced by X-rays,
both V0 and Kmax increase.
Reason (R): Photoelectrons are emitted with speeds ranging from zero to a maximum value because of
the range of frequencies present in the incident light.
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): The photocells inserted in the door light electric circuit are used as automatic door opener.
Reason (R): Abrupt change in photocurrent helps in open the door.
14. Case Study Based Questions: The phenomenon of photoelectric emission was discovered in 1887 by
Heinrich hertz during his electromagnetic waves by means of spark across the detector loop were
enhanced. When the emitter plate was illuminated by ultraviolet light from an arc lamp. According to this
effect, there is emission of electron from the surface of metal when a light beam of suitable frequency is
incident on it.
(i) Light of wavelength 2500 Å falls on a metal surface of work function 3.5 eV. What is the kinetic energy
(in eV) of
(a) the fastest and
(b) The slowest electron emitted from the surface. If the same light falls on another surface of work
function 5.5 eV, what will be the energy of emitted electrons?
(ii) An electron is accelerated through a potential difference of 64 V. What is the de-Broglie wavelength
associated with it? To which part of the electromagnetic spectrum this wavelength correspond?
15. Einstein’s Planck’s quantum theory explains photoelectric emission. He assumed that radiation is not a
wave but a particle (photon) to quantized energy and emission of electron is the result of the elastic
collision between the incident particle (photon) and electrons of atoms on / inside the surface of the metals.
In 1924, Louis de-Broglie put forward a hypothesis that like radiation, matter should also possess dual
nature. It means that moving particles of matter display wave like properties.
(i) Draw the graph for depicting energy of a photon ‘E’ as a function of its wavelength λ.
(ii) Find the momentum of a photon of wavelength 5000 Å.
(iii) An electron and a photon have equal de-Broglie wavelength. Which of them will have greater kinetic
energy?
CHAPTER-12: ATOM

1. If 13.6 eV energy is required to ionize the hydrogen atom, then energy required to remove an electron
from n = 2 is
(i) 10.2 eV
(ii) 0 eV
(iii) 3.4 eV
(iv) 6.8 eV.

Page - 152
2. The K.E. of the electron in an orbit of radius r in hydrogen atom is proportional to
(i) e2/r
(ii) e2/2r
(iii) 2e2/r
(iv) e2/3r
3. The longest wavelength in Balmer series of hydrogen spectrum will be
(i) 6557 Å
(ii) 1216 Å
(iii) 4800 Å
(iv) 5600 Å
4. Which of the following spectral series falls within the visible range of electromagnetic radiation?
(i) Lyman series
(ii) Balmer series
(iii) Paschen series
(iv) Pfund series
5. The diagram shows the energy levels for an electron in a certain atom.
Which transition shown represents the emission of a photon with the
most energy?
(i) I
(ii) II
(iii) III
(iv) IV
6. The electrons in the Bohr’s orbit have
(i) K.E. greater than P.E.
(ii) P.E. greater than K.E.
(iii) the same values
(iv) none of these
7. The energy of hydrogen atom in the nth orbit is En, then the energy in the nth orbit of single ionized
helium atom is
(i) En/2
(ii) 2 En
(iii) 4En
(iv) En/4
8. On moving up in the energy states of an H-like atom, the energy difference between two consecutive
energy states
(i) decreases
(ii) increases
(iii) first decreases then increases.
(iv) first increases then decreases.
9. In Bohr’s model of an atom which of the following is an integral multiple of h/2π?
(i) Kinetic energy
(ii) Radius of an atom
(iii) Potential energy
(iv) Angular momentum
10. In Bohr’s model, the atomic radius of the first orbit is r0. Then, the radius of the third orbit is
(i) r0/9
(ii) r0
Page - 153
(iii) 9r0
(iv) 3r0
11. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Electrons in the atom are held due to coulomb forces.
Reason (R): The atom is stable only because the centripetal force due to Coulomb’s law is balanced by
the centrifugal force.
12. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): In Lyman series, the ratio of minimum and maximum wavelength is 3/4
Reason (R): Lyman series constitute spectral lines corresponding to transition from higher energy to
ground
state of hydrogen atom.
13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): If total energy of an electron in an H- atom is positive, then the electron will be bound to
the nucleus.
Reason (R): Bohr model is valid for both one electron and multi-electron atom
14. Case Study Based Questions: Hydrogen spectrum consists of discrete bright lines in a dark background
and it is specifically known as hydrogen emission spectrum. There is one more type of hydrogen spectrum
that exists where we get dark lines on the bright background, it is known as absorption spectrum. Balmer
found an empirical formula by the observation of a small part of this spectrum and it is represented
by 1/λ=R (1/22−1/n2), where n=3, 4, 5 …. For Lyman series, the emission is from first state to n th state, for
Paschen series, it is from third state to nth state, for Brackett series, it is from fourth state to nth state and
for Pfund series, it is from fifth state to nth state,
(i) What is the number of spectral lines in hydrogen atom ?
(ii) Which series of hydrogen spectrum corresponds to ultraviolet region?
(iii)Find the number of spectral lines, when Hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to another
state with principal quantum number equal to 4.
OR
(iii) Find the longest and shortest wave length of Balmer series?
15. Case Study Based Questions: Neils Bohr introduced the atomic Hydrogen model in 1913. He described
it as a positively charged nucleus, comprised of protons and neutrons, surrounded by a negatively charged
electron cloud. In the model, electrons orbit the nucleus in atomic shells. The atom is held together by
electrostatic forces between the positive nucleus and negative surroundings. Bohr correctly proposed that
Page - 154
the energy and radii of the orbits of electrons in atoms are quantized, with energy for transitions between
orbits given by, ΔE= hv = Ei−Ef Where ΔE is the change in energy between the initial and final orbits and
hv is the energy of an absorbed or emitted photon.
(i) What is the Bohr quantization condition for the angular momentum of an electron in the
second orbit?
(ii) What is the value of ionization energy of a hydrogen atom?
(iii) Find out the wavelength of the electron orbiting in the ground state of hydrogen atom.
OR
(iii) A Hydrogen atom initially in the ground level absorbs a photon which excites it to the n= 4
level. Find the amount of energy absorbed by the photon.
CHAPTER-13: NUCLEI

1. A Nucleus of mass number A has a radius R such that:


i. R A
ii. R A
iii. R A
iv. R A
2. Nuclear mass M is found to be:
i. Always less than total mass of its individual protons and neutrons
ii. Always equal to the total mass of its individual neutrons
iii. Always equal to the total mass of its individual protons and neutrons
iv. Always greater than total mass of its individual protons and neutrons
3. The difference in mass of a nucleus and its constituents is called
i. Mass number
ii. Rest mass
iii. Lost mass
iv. Mass defect
4. Which of the following is the correct expression for mass defect ∆𝑚 ?
i. 𝑍𝑚 + (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚 − 𝑀
ii. 𝑍𝑚 − (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚 − 𝑀
iii. 𝑍𝑚 + (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚 + 𝑀
iv. 𝑍𝑚 + (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚 + 𝑀
5. Nuclear fusion is possible:
i. Only between light nuclei
ii. Between both light and heavy nuclei
iii. Only between nuclei which are stable against 𝛽 − decay
iv. Only between heavy nuclei
6. When a hydrogen bomb explodes, which of the following is used?
i. Nuclear Fusion
ii. Neither Fission nor Fusion
iii. Both Nuclear Fission and Nuclear Fission
iv. Nuclear Fission
7. Which of the following materials is a good moderator?
i. Helium
ii. Cadmium
Page - 155
iii. Ordinary water
iv. Graphite
8. The average binding energy of a nucleon inside an atomic nucleus is about
i. 8 GeV
ii. 8 KeV
iii. 8.5 MeV
iv. 8 eV
9. The energy released when 1 amu of mass is completely converted into energy is
i. 1 MeV
ii. 797 MeV
iii. 391 MeV
iv. 931 MeV
10. In a nuclear reaction which of the following is conserved?
i. Momentum
ii. Charge
iii. Sum of mass and energy
iv. All of these
11. As the mass number A increases, which of the following quantities related to a nucleus does not change?
i. Volume
ii. Density
iii. Mass
iv. Binding Energy
12. Graphite and heavy water are two common moderators used in a nuclear reactor. The function of the
moderator is
i. To control the energy released in the reactor
ii. To cool the reactor
iii. To slow down the neutrons to thermal energies
iv. To absorb the neutrons and stop the chain reaction
13. What is the rest mass energy of an electron?
i. 931 MeV
ii. 0.51 MeV
iii. 1 eV
iv. None of these
14. The mass of neutron and proton are 1.0087 u and 1.0073 u respectively. If the neutrons and protons
combine to form a helium nucleus of mass 4.0015 u, the binding energy of the helium nucleus will be:
i. 27.3 MeV
ii. 28.4 MeV
iii. 20.8 MeV
iv. 14.2 MeV
15. Binding energy per nucleon versus mass number curve for nuclei is
shown in fig. W, X, Y, and Z are four nuclei indicated on the curve.
The process that would release energy is
i. X → Y + Z
ii. W → 2Y
iii. W → X + Z
iv. Y → 2Z

Page - 156
16. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): The ratio of time taken for light emission from an atom to that for release of nuclear energy in
fission is 1 :100
Reason (R): Time taken of the light emission from an atom is of the order of 10-8 s.
17. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Unlike electric forces and gravitational forces, nuclear force has limited range.
Reason (R): Nuclear force do not obey inverse square law.
18. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion: Heavy water is used as moderator in nuclear reactor.
Reason: When two bodies having approximately same mass undergo an elastic collision, energy transfer is
maximum.
19. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): Thermonuclear fusion reactions may become the source of unlimited power for mankind.
Reason (R): A single fusion event involving isotopes of hydrogen produces more energy than energy from
nuclear fission of U.
20. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
Assertion (A): The binding energy per nucleon for nuclei with atomic mass number A > 100, decreases with A.
Reason (R): The nuclear forces are weak for heavier.
21. Case Study Based Questions:
Neutrons and protons are identical particles in the sense that their masses are nearly the same and the force,
called nuclear force, does into distinguishing them. The nuclear force is the strongest force. The stability of the
nucleus is determined by the neutron-proton ratio or mass defect or packing fraction. The shape of the nucleus
Page - 157
is calculated by quadruple moment and the spin of the nucleus depends on even or odd mass numbers. The
volume of the nucleus depends on the mass number. The whole mass of the atom (nearly 99%) is centered at the
nucleus.
i. Write the formula for packing fraction.
ii. Two protons are kept at a separation of 40 Å. Fn is the nuclear force and Fe is the electrostatic force between them.
How are they related?
iii. State two properties of nuclear forces.
OR
Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 8:125. What is the ratio of their nuclear radii?
22. Case Study Based Questions:
Nuclear fission reaction is the nuclear reaction which is induced by neutron. For example in the fission of
uranium, the energy of the order of 200 MeV per fission is released. While the nuclear reaction in which two or
more nuclei get fused together to form the larger nucleus is called as nuclear fusion reaction. The nuclear fusion
which is initiated by increasing the temperature of the system is called as thermonuclear fusion.
The controlled fusion reactions are initiated to produce steady power. The heat energy created on the sun is due
to the nuclear fusion reaction. While the huge amount of energy released after the explosion of atom bomb is
only due to the nuclear fission reaction.
i. For which value of multiplication factor the operation of the reactor is said to be critical?
ii. What is the source of energy output in the interior of the stars?
iii. What is the work of control rods in nuclear reactor? Which is the most commonly used material as control
rod?
OR
Why is nuclear fusion not possible in laboratory?
CHAPTER-15: SEMICONDUCTOR & ELECTRONIC DEVICES

1. The dominant mechanisms for motion of charge carriers in forward and reverse biased silicon p-n junctions are :
(a) Drift in forward bias, diffusion in reverse bias.
(b) Diffusion in forward bias, drift in reverse bias.
(c) Diffusion in both forward and reverse bias.
(d) Drift in both forward and reverse bias.
2. The circuit shown in the figure contains two diodes each with a forward resistance of
50 ohm and with infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is 6 V, the current
through the 100 ohm resistance (in ampere) is
(a) Zero (b) 0.02 (c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
3. At absolute Zero, Si acts as
(a) Non-metals (b) Metal (c) Insulator (d) None of these
4. In an unbiased p-n junction, electrons diffuse from n-region to p-region because
(a) Electrons travel across the junction due to potential difference.
(b) Electron concentration in n-region is more as compared to that in p-region.
(c) Only electrons move from n to p region and not the vice-versa.
(d) Holes in p-region attract them.
5. When p-n junction diode is forward biased, then
(a) The depletion region is reduced and barrier height is increased.
(b) The depletion region is widened and barrier height is reduced.
(c) Both the depletion region and barrier height are reduced.
(d) Both the depletion region and barrier height are increased.
6. The forward biased diode connection is
Page - 158
(a) (b)

(c) (d)

7. The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel. What is the
current flowing in the circuit?
(a) 1.71 A (b) 2.0 A (c) 2.31 A (d) 1.33 A
8. Identify the property which is not characteristic of a semiconductor?
(a) At a very low temperature, it behaves like an insulator.
(b) At higher temperatures two types of charge carriers will cause conductivity.
(c) The charge carriers are electrons and holes in the valance band at higher temperatures.
(d) The semiconductor is electrically neutral.
9. The energy gap between the valance band and the conduction band for a material is 6 eV. The material is
(a) An insulator (b) A metal
(c) An intrinsic semiconductor (d) A superconductor
10. N-type semiconductor is
(a) Positively charged (b) Negatively charged
(c) Neutral (d) Positive or negative depending upon doping material
11. A Si specimen is made into p-type semiconductor by doping on an average one indium atom per 6 × 10 silicon
atoms. If the number density of atoms in Si be 6 × 10 /𝑚 , what is the number of indium atoms required per 𝑐𝑚 ?
(a) 10 (b) 10 (c) 10 (d) 10
12. If the forward voltage in a diode is increased, then the width of the depletion region

(a) Increases (b) Decreases (c) Fluctuates (d) No change


13. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): A pure semiconductor has negative temperature coefficient of resistance.
Reason(R): On raising the temperature, more charge carriers are released, conductance increases and resistance
decreases.
14. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): If a p-n junction diode is reversed biased then the resistance measured by an ohmmeter, will be
high.
Reason(R): When the junction diode is reversed biased, a small current passes through it called as reverse
saturation current.
15. Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct
answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
Page - 159
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also false.
Assertion (A): At low temperature semiconductor behaves as insulator.
Reason(R): In case of insulator the conduction band is overlapping with the valence band.
16. Case Study Based Questions
A rectifier is an electrical device that converts alternating
current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, to direct
current (DC), which flows in only one direction. The process is
known as rectification. Depending on the type of alternating current
supply and the arrangement of the rectifier circuit, the output voltage
may require additional smoothing to produce a uniform steady
voltage. Many applications of rectifiers, such as power supplies for
radio, television and computer equipment, require a steady constant DC voltage. In these applications the output
of the rectifier is smoothed by an electronic filter.
(i) What do you mean by pulsated dc?
(ii) Why a diode is preferred as rectifier?
(iii) Write two points of difference between a half wave rectifier and a full wave rectifier.
OR
Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier with capacitor filter. What is the role of capacitor in the
circuit?
17. Case Study Based Questions
A p–n junction diode is made of a crystal of semiconductor, usually
silicon. Impurities are added to it to create a region on one side that
contains negative charge carriers, called a n-type semiconductor and a
region on the other side that contains positive charge carriers, called a p-
type semiconductor. When the n-type and p-type materials are attached
together, a momentary flow of electrons occurs from the n side to the p
side resulting in a third region between the two. When a sufficiently
higher electrical potential is applied to the P side than to the N side, it allows electrons to flow. The junction does
not allow the flow of electrons in the opposite direction when the potential is applied in reverse manner.
(i) What is depletion layer?
(ii) Draw the V-I characteristic of a junction diode.
(iii) Give two points of difference between forward biasing and reverse biasing of p-n junction diode.
OR
A 2 V battery is connected across AB as shown in the figure. Find the value
of the current supplied by the battery when in one case battery’s positive
terminal is connected to A and in other case when positive terminal of battery
is connected to B with proper explanation.

Page - 160
SOLUTIONS/HINTS FOR THE CHAPTERWISE QUESTIONS
CHAPTER-1: ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ANS. ii iii i iii ii ii iii ii iv iii

Q.N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ANS. iii iii iii iii i i ii iii i iv

Q.N. 21 22

ANS. iv i
23. i. Zero
ii. Remains same (The electric flux is independent upon size)

iii. (a) s  a 2 iˆ  100 iˆ cm2  102 iˆ m2
 
  E  S  3 103 iˆ 102 iˆ  30 Nm2C 1
(b) ϕ= E S cosθ=3×103×10-2 cos 60 = 15 Nm2C-1
OR
(a) ϕ = ϕ1 + ϕ2
= - E1S1 + E2S2
=-50×1×25×10-4 + 50×2×25×10-4
= 0.125 Nm2C-1
(b) q = ɛ0 ϕ
=8.85×10-12 ×0.125
=1.1×10-12 C
24. i. a. Straight line
b. Parabolic
ii. Electron
F eE
Acceleration, a  
m m
Since electron has less mass, it has greater acceleration.
eE
iii. Acceleration of electron, a 
m
CHAPTER-2: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ANS. i iv ii ii iii ii iii ii iv ii

Page - 161
Q.N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ANS. i iii ii iii iv i i iv iii iv

21. (i) 0V

(ii) q=CV=50×10−12×105=5μC

(iii) Volume of large sphere=64 x Volume of small sphere

∴ 4/3πR3=64x4/3πr3 ⇒R=4r and Q total =64q

C′=4πε0R ⇒C′= (4πε0) ⋅4r⇒C′=4C

OR

Here C=50pF=50×10−12F, V=104V

R=14πε0, C=9×109mF−1×50×10−12, F= 45 x 10-2 m = 45 cm

22. (i) k= Capacitance with dielectric /Capacitance without dielectric = 200μF/4μF=50

(ii) Capacitance of the capacitor with air between plates

C′=ε0A/d=8pF

With the capacitor is filled with dielectric (k = 5) between its plates and the distance between the
plates is reduced by half, capacitance become C=ε 0kAd/2=ε0×5×Ad/2=10C′=10×8=80pF

(iii) Now capacitance of capacitor before inserting metal plate is C = (ε 0A)/d and after the insertion of
any dielectric plate filling the capacitor partially is C = (ε0A)/ [(d-t) + t/K]. We know that K for a metal is
infinite thus C = (ε0A) / (d-t). Here t=d/2 thus C’= (2ε0A)/d=2C, C: C’=1:2

23. (i) Both (1) and (2)

(ii) Q¬1 is positive Q2 is negative

(iii) (a) Q1 >Q¬2

(b) Conservative OR

Zero as it is a dipole and the potential of a dipole is zero

CHAPTER-3: CURRENT ELECTRICITY

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ANS. i ii ii i iv i ii ii iii ii

Page - 162
Q.N. 11 12 13 14 15

ANS. iii i iii i iii

16. (i) 𝐼 = = 𝐼 = 10 × 1.6 × 10 × = 1.6 × 10 𝐴

(ii) Current and mobility.

(iii) 𝜎 = , 𝜏= , 𝜏 ∝ , 𝜏 : 𝜏 : 𝜏 = : : = 2: 1: 4

Z maximum, Y minimum.

OR

(iv) Current density increases with increase in potential gradient and decreases with increase in
temperature.

17. (i) [𝑅] = [𝑀 𝐿 𝑇 𝐴 ]


(ii) Specific resistance depends upon temperature and nature of the material of the substance.
× × . × . ×
(iii) 𝜌 = = = 0.25 × 10 𝛺𝑚
×

OR
(iv)

CHAPTER-4: MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ANS. i iii iv ii iv ii iii i ii iii ii i iii

14. (i) 𝜏 = 𝑁𝐼𝐴𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 Where 𝜃 𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 angle between normal to the coil and magnetic field.
(ii) It is having very less value of K. Hence voltage sensitivity and current sensitivity will be very high.
(iii) Is = 5 div/mA = 5× 10 div/A
Vs = 20 div/volt
×
Resistance of the galvanometer = =250 ohm
OR
𝐼
𝑉 =
𝑅
𝐼 =𝐼 + 𝐼 = 𝐼
𝑅 = 1.5𝑅
Page - 163
𝑉 = = = 𝑉 =80%𝑉
.

15. (i) = Bqv, r =


(
(ii) Time period (T) = = )=
(iii)Radius r =
For both the particles speed, magnetic field and charge are same. So r∝m
As mass of electron is less than mass of proton⇒ radius of the path followed by electron is smaller.
OR
For proton and electron amount of charge is same. We know that frequency of revolution =
So, frequency of revolution ∝

CHAPTER-5: MAGNETISM

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ANS. i iii iv iii iii iii i iii i iv iii iv

13. (i) ϕ=∫B.dA


(ii) This law states that, if any two magnetic poles of suitable strengths m 1 and m2 are held apart by a distance r,
then the force of attraction or repulsion between the two poles is said to be directly proportional to the product
of their pole strengths and inversely proportional to the square of the distances between their centres.
F ∝ m1m2/r2. Therefore F =k m1m2/r2
(iii) Here m=1.5J/T,B=0.22T
W=−mB (cosθ2−cosθ1)
(a) θ1=0o (along the field), θ2=90o (perpendicular to the field), W=−0.33 (0−1)J=0.33 J
(b) θ1=0o, θ2=180o, W=−1.5×0.22(-1−1)=0.66 J
OR
Torque = mBsinθ
(a) θ = 90o ⟹τ=0.33 Nm
(b) τ = mBsin180o=0 Nm
14. (a) Length of the bar magnet L=3cm=3×10−2m
Area of bar magnet A=2cm2=2×10−4m2
Thus volume of bar magnet V=AL
∴ V=3×10−2×3×10−4=6×10−6m3
Magnetic moment μ=3Am2
Thus intensity of magnetisation I=Vμ
∴ I=3/(6×10−6) =5×105A/m
(b) Relative permeability of iron μr=6000
Magnetic susceptibility χm=μr−1=5999
(c) A diamagnetic specimen would move towards the weaker region of the field while a paramagnetic
specimen would move towards the stronger region.
OR
For a paramagnetic material, the relative permeability lies between 1<μ r<1+ε and its susceptibility lies
between 0<X<ε.
Page - 164
Hence, 'A' is a para-magnetic material and its susceptibility is positive. This is because its relative permeability
is slightly greater than unity.
For a diamagnetic material, the relative permeability lies between 0≤μ r<1 and its susceptibility lies
between −1<X<0. Hence, 'B' is a diamagnetic material and its susceptibility is negative. This is because its
relative permeability is less than unity. Here μ r and X refer to the relative permeability and susceptibility.

CHAPTER-6: ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INDUCTION

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ANS. iv b iv ii iii ii ii iii i iii iii i i iv iii

16. (i) Electromagnetic induction


(ii) Magnetic flux
(iii) Opposite direction OR No current flows through galvanometer
17. (i) mutual induction
(ii) VsA-1
(iii) 0.05H OR increases

CHAPTER-7: ALTERNATE CURRENT

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ANS. Iii Ii Iii Ii I Iii Iii I Iii Iv Iii Iv i

14.
(i) X is Resistance, Y is inductance and Z is capacitance of the circuit.
(ii) Z = 𝑅 + ( 𝑋 − 𝑋 )2, where R is the resistance, XL is the inductive reactance and
XC is the capacitive reactance.
(iii) The variation of current with the changing frequency of applied voltage in a circuit
in which X, Y and Z are connected in series is as shown below:
Significance :

Such an LCR circuit connected in series admits maximum current corresponding to a given frequency of a.c.
This frequency is known as series resonance frequency.

Such circuits find application in radios, TV receiver sets etc.

OR

15.
(i) If high voltage is used to transmit power, then the current through the wire will be less as I = P/V. Hence,
power loss = I2R will also be less.

Page - 165
(ii) P= VI cos∅, where 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ∅ is the power factor. If 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ∅ is small, then current has to be large. This leads
to large power loss caused by heat which is given by H = I2RT. Hence, a low power factor implies large
power loss.
(iii) The power factor 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ∅ is the ratio of resistance and impedance of an ac circuit.
𝑅
𝑐𝑜𝑠∅ =
𝑍
(a) Maximum power factor is 1 when Z=R, when circuit is purely resistive.
(b) Minimum power factor is 0 when R = 0,
When circuit is purely inductive or capacitive.

OR

(a) Impedance of series LCR circuit is given by


Z = 𝑅 + ( 𝑋 − 𝑋 )2
For the impedance, Z to be minimum, XL=XC
(b) Power P= VI cos∅ when ∅= 𝜋/2,
P= 0
Therefore, wattles current flows when the impedance of the circuit is purely inductive or purely
capacitive.
In other way we can say, for wattles current to flow, circuit should not have any ohmic resistance (R= 0)

CHAPTER-8: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ANS. i ii iv iii i iv i iii iii ii ii i

13. (i) Radio waves, microwaves, UV-rays and X-rays.


(ii) γ-rays are the electromagnetic waves of frequency range 3 × 10 18 Hz to 5 × 1022 Hz and have the highest
penetrating power.
(iii)Given: By = 8 × 10-6 sin [2 × 1011 t + 300 π x] T
(a) Standard equation is,

The oscillations of E→ and B→ fields are perpendicular to each other as well as to the direction of
propagation of the wave. So we take electric field in z-direction because oscillating magnetic field is in y-di
recti on and propagation of the wave is in x-direction.
OR

Page - 166
Infrared rays are produced by hot bodies and molecules. This may involve vibration and bending of molecules.
Infrared band lies adjacent to low-frequency or long-wavelength end of the visible spectrum. Infrared waves
are sometimes referred to as heat waves.
Use: Infrared rays are used to take photographs in darkness. These are also used to study secret writing. They
are also used in physical therapy.
14. (i)

(ii)Einstein’s explanation of photoelectric effect led de Broglie to the wave-particle duality, i.e., matter
exhibits wave as well as particle properties. Electromagnetic waves are characterized by wave properties, such
as periodicity in space-time, wavelength, amplitude, frequency, wave velocity etc. It transports energy but no
matter.
The term wave-particle duality refers to the behavior where both wave-like and particle-like properties are
exhibited under different conditions by the same entity. Hence electromagnetic waves show particle properties
such as definite position, size, mass, velocity, momentum, energy etc.
For a photon of momentum (p), an associated wavelength is given by λ=h/p.
(iii)The displacement current arises due to varying electric field

If q be instantaneous charge, then E is electric field between the plates of capacitor at that time and A is area
of plate; then

OR
A dc battery connected to an ideal capacitor ‘ provides only a momentarily charge, whereas an ac battery
allows a continuous flow of current

As charge on capacitor plates changes, electric field associated with that also changes and hence giving rise to
a displacement current according to

CHAPTER-9: RAY OPTICS

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Page - 167
ANS. iii ii i i iii ii iv iii iii ii

Q.N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

ANS. iv i i iv i i ii iv

19) (i) In a compound microscope objective has focal length little shorter than that of the eye piece. This is
done so that objective lens forms image within the focal length of the eye-piece.
(ii) Yes. Magnifying power of a microscope, m 𝛼
(iii) Both 𝑓 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑓 depend on µ hence on the colour of light used.

Given, 𝑓 = 1.25cm, 𝑓 = 5cm D=25cm, m=30


Magnifying power m= (1 + )

= 1+ = 6.25𝑐𝑚
.

20) (i) Both Zircon and Rutile can roughly substitute a diamond because they have refractive indices close to
the diamond.
(ii) No. A material having high physical density not necessarily have high optical density.
(iii) Here, critical angle= sin
= sin = 24.4
.

CHAPTER-10: WAVE OPTICS

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

ANS. ii iii iii ii iii ii iii iii iv i iv ii iv iii

15. (i) The two sources of light must be coherent with same frequency or wavelength and with same phase or constant
phase difference. The two sources should preferably have the same amplitude.
(ii) The condition required for the interference pattern to be visible properly and distinctly is as follows-

If the source slit is moved towards or closer to the double slit plane then this condition is not satisfied. The value of
S decreases and the interference fringes will overlap on one another. Due to this interference pattern will be less
sharp and have low intensity and slowly disappear.
µ
(iii) β = , = = , β 2 = 5mm/1.25 = 4mm.
µ
OR
10 = D, a = 0.2mm.
16. (i) To observe diffraction, the size of the obstacle should be of the order of wavelength
(ii) When red light is replaced by blue light (λB <λR) the diffraction pattern bands becomes narrow and crowded
together.

Page - 168
(iii) Here d=0.1 mm, λ=6000A, D=0.5 m
.
for third dark band d sinθ =3λ; sinθ =3λ/d =y/D, 𝑌 = = = 9mm.
.
OR

Light of wavelength 600 nm is incident normally on a slit of width 0.2 mm. The angular width of central maxima in
× ×
the diffraction pattern is (measured from minimum to minimum), 𝜃 = = = 6 × 10 rad
×

CHAPTER-11: DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ANS. iv iii iv iv iv ii iii i iii ii i iii i

14.(i) (a)K.E. of the fastest electron= 1.47 eV


(b)K.E. of the slowest electron= 0 eV
.
Calculation:- Formula λ= Ao

(ii)
Λ = 0.153 Ao
Identification: wavelength belongs to the X-ray part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
15.(i) Graph:- E verses λ
p=
(ii)
p = 1.3x10-27 kgms-1
(iii) Formula for de-Broglie’s wavelength
Comparison of de-Broglie’s wavelength of an electron and a photon, K ph ˃ Ke

CHAPTER-12: ATOM

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ANS. iii ii i ii iii i iii i iv iii iii ii iv

14.(i) infinity
(ii) Lyman series
(iii) N= n(n-1)/2=4 x 3/2=6
OR
Longest wave length=656.3 nm
Shortest wave length=364.6 nm
15.(i) h/𝜋
(ii) 13.6 eV
(iii) ƛ =hc/E=91.2 nm
OR
E 4 – E1= 12.75 eV

CHAPTER-13: NUCLEI

Page - 169
Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ANS. iv i iv i i iii iv iii iv iv

Q.N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ANS. ii iii i ii ii i ii i iii iii

1. (i) (M − A)
(ii) A
Fn << Fe
Explanation: Nuclear force is much stronger than the electrostatic force inside the nucleus i.e.,
at distances of the order of Fermi. At 40 Å, nuclear force is ineffective and only electrostatic
force of repulsion is present. This is very high at this distance because nuclear force is not acting
now and the gravitational force is very feeble. 𝐹 << 𝐹 In this case.
It is attractive in nature but with a repulsive core.

The range of a nuclear force is very short.


(iii)
The nuclear force is identical for all nucleons.
At a distance of less than 0.7 Fermi, this force becomes repulsive. (Any two)
OR

2. (i) K=1
(ii) Thermonuclear fusion
(iii) Control rods of cadmium are used to control the rate of nuclear reaction which are mostly made
up of neutron absorbing material.
OR
To initiate the nuclear fusion reaction, very much high temperature is required. Such a high
temperature cannot be produced in the laboratory. That is why nuclear fusion reaction is not
possible in laboratory.

CHAPTER-15: SEMICONDUCTOR & ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Q.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ANS. b b c b c c a c a c b b a b c
16. (i) The dc value of the current which is not steady and superimposed with some ac components is called as
pulsated dc.

Page - 170
(ii) p-n junction diode allows current during forward biasing and does not allow during reverse biasing. This
unidirectional property of diode is the reason behind its preference as rectifier.

(iii)
Half wave rectifier Full wave rectifier

1. It gives the output voltage during the 1. It gives the output voltage during the
positive half cycle of the input voltage. entire cycle of the input voltage.

2. One junction diode is used. 2. Two junction diodes are used.

OR

(iii)The capacitor acts as a filter here. It offers less resistance to ac and


blocks dc so that only dc component passes across the load.

17. (i) On both side of the junction the region having immobile ions is
known as depletion layer. It is depleted of free charge carriers either
electron or holes.

(ii)

(iii)
Forward biasing Reverse biasing

1. When positive terminal of the battery is 1. When positive terminal of the battery is
connected to p side and negative terminal is connected to n side and negative terminal is
connected to n side then it is known as connected to p side then it is known as
forward biasing. reverse biasing.

2. Depletion layer is reduced. 2. Depletion layer is increased.

OR
Case I-Diode D1 is forward biased and Diode D2 is reversed biased. I=2/5=0.4A

Case II-Diode D2 is forward biased and Diode D1 is reversed biased. I=2/10=0.2A

Page - 171

You might also like